The PALO

MUERTO
The PALO
MUERTO
A Novel of Santeria

Daniel Vega

iUniverse, Inc.
New York Lincoln Shanghai
 The Palo Muerto
A Novel of Santeria

Copyright © 2006 by Daniel Vega

All rights reserved. No part of this book may be used or reproduced by any
means, graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including photocopying, recording,
taping or by any information storage retrieval system without the written
permission of the publisher except in the case of brief quotations embodied in
critical articles and reviews.

iUniverse books may be ordered through booksellers or by contacting:

iUniverse
2021 Pine Lake Road, Suite 100
Lincoln, NE 68512
www.iuniverse.com
1-800-Authors (1-800-288-4677)

This is a work of fiction. All of the characters, names, incidents, organizations,

and dialogue in this novel are either the products of the author’s imagination
or are used fictitiously.

ISBN-13: 978-0-595-41298-3 (pbk)

ISBN-13: 978-0-595-85653-4 (ebk)
ISBN-10: 0-595-41298-X (pbk)
ISBN-10: 0-595-85653-5 (ebk)

Printed in the United States of America

 1

The sound of running water sliced through the silence of Emmanuel’s home.
Although the dimly lit chandler was on, most of the light came from candles
which rested along the side of catholic images, which caused long shadows to
dance along the walls. The scent of roses was carried through the house by a soft
breeze which seemed to come from nowhere.
Though this seemed normal in nature, there was nothing normal about it.
While being in a Santero’s house, it is thought to be wise not to attempt to make
sense of the events that take place therein. Spirits walk about their homes, along
with the powerful Orisha, who govern the world.
In this part of North Philadelphia, many people proclaimed themselves to be
Santeros. Looking closely at them you would notice that their faith was as
untrusting as the many people that sold drugs on the corners of these highly lit-
tered streets.
It was here that Emmanuel stood in his kitchen, washing away the evidence of
a recently eaten meal from his dishware. He washed each dish, dried it, and
placed each in the recently remodeled wooden cabinets lining the walls. He fin-
ished his last task before turning the water off and drying his hands on a towel
atop the marble counter.
He walked across the room, his jeans slightly wet from his tasks, some splashes
on his shirt. After noticing the scent of roses, which came from no source that he
was aware of, he quickly dismissed it as a sign from the Orisha. Often, his spiri-
tual mother, Oshun, would create these sweet scents to show her love for him, in
his home.

-1-
2 The Palo Muerto

He came to his livingroom, grabbed the remote control to his television, and
sat on his recliner. He had leaned back, removing from his neck several beaded
necklaces, and placed them on a white cloth which rested on the coffee table next
to his chair. He lifted the remote and turned the TV on, a sign of relief crept
across his face, understanding that he could spend his night relaxing.
He flicked through the channels, looking for a show to watch to entertain his
evening. Laughing as he came across a comedy show on H.B.O. He put the
remote down, intending on losing himself to a night of harmless humor.
His face became sober as the hairs on his neck stood on end, a woman wearing
yellow robes stood behind him, as though appearing from now where, then
quickly vanished. A whisper came to his ear, and he rose to his feet, crossing the
room to his front door. He grabbed the doorknob and opened the door, there
stood a man with a grey trench coat, and a tan baseball cap. From his stance it
appeared as though he was prepared to knock, before the door was opened.
“Jesus!” the man took back in surprise. “I hate it when you do that.”
“What is it now, Jacob?” Emmanuel asked, walking away from the door, leav-
ing it opened, and returning to his recliner. “Its 9 O: Clock, my comedy show is
on”
Jacob looked at the young man, his deep brown eyes, and neatly trimmed goat
tee. It was hard to believe that this man had so much knowledge in the arts of
voodoo and witchcraft. Looking him over, he appeared to be just an average
27-year-old Hispanic man. Knowing Emmanuel for as long as he knew him, he
was aware of all the amazing things he had done, things that he himself wished
we could do.
“I have some work for you.” Said Jacob. “A woman across town, claims there
are things in her house that don’t belong there.”
“Tell her to deal with it.” Emmanuel said, without turning his head away
from the TV. “I’m off tonight, trying to enjoy some peace and quiet.”
“Emmanuel, I’ve been there.” He answered. “There are things happening
there that have turned my stomach. I’ve never been so scared in my life.”
Emmanuel turned away from the television and looked Jacob up and down.
He was an old man, been working in the fields of Santeria for years, and seen
many things. It seemed unreasonable to believe that anything could frighten this
man. His wrinkles were keep, his blue eyes shined, and though he had a full set of
hair in his early 60’s, it was completely grey.
“What should I expect?” Emmanuel asked, turning back to his Television.
“The devil.” Was his answer.
 Daniel Vega 3

The two of them sat in a car, silently as Jacob focused on the road, as they
drove through North Philadelphia. Emmanuel, seemed to be lost in thought,
turning what appeared to be a wooden cane which rested against his lap. The
image of two faces carefully carved into it, with a small hole on top which long
been sealed with some kind of wax. He was dressed in all white, with a white
head wrap around his head, and though he seemed to be silent, his lips moved
almost as if he was in prayer.
“Have you found anything out?” Jacob broke the silence with his question.
“The usual.” Emmanuel smiled. “You know, spirits, voodoo, witchcraft.” He
laughed as though not serious about the situation at hand.
“I need you to focus, Emmanuel.” Jacob’s tone was strong and firm. “This
family isn’t simply friends of mine. They are my family.”
“Well it comes with the territory.” Emmanuel evaded the sober atmosphere,
turning his head to look out the window as he spoke. “You can’t spend your
entire life fighting them off and not expect them to retaliate, Old Fool. You’ve
been in this longer then I have, you should know better.”
“Not everyone has your gift.”
“Curse!” Emmanuel said, cutting Jacob off. “Only someone without it would
see it as a blessing. I’ve always felt like a side show attraction. You know that.”
“Come on now, stop feeling sorry for yourself.” Jacob said, turning the wheel
to the car, it seemed that it had gotten darker outside of the car for some reason.
“The things you can do, are so amazing. All that you have accomplished should
prove to you that it’s nothing less then Gods hand on you.”
“If you insist.”
Jacob slammed on the brakes, sending Emmanuel’s cane sliding off his lap.
“Jacob!” he said, leaning down and grabbing his Pale Muerto. “You forget
how to drive?”
He looked in front of the car and seen a woman standing in the center of the
street. With the hood to her sweater covering most of her face, she faced the car,
standing completely still. The heat seemed to leave the car, leaving the two feel-
ing chills crawl up and down their backs. Her arms held her sweater tightly
around her, her skirt seemed not to be affected by the breeze that an approaching
storm was bringing.
“What the hell is this woman’s problem?” The tone in Jacob’s voice proved his
impatience, blowing his horn farther confirmed Emmanuel’s resolve.
“Drive, Old Friend.” Emmanuel said, though the tone of his voice was soft, it
carried authority. “There isn’t anyone there.”
4 The Palo Muerto

Jacob looked over at Emmanuel, his mouth seemed to form words though he
kept them from escaping his lips, turning back to the road, he saw that there was
no one there. He signed, continuing his coarse of direction, the atmosphere
becoming just what Emmanuel had attempted to prevent it from becoming.
Sober.
They parked in front of a roll home. All of North Philadelphia consists of roll
homes, though this particular area, Feltonville, stood out slightly by the house’s
porches and front concrete staircases.
Emmanuel laughed to himself as he saw the house he knew he was about to
enter. All seemed well, with the exception of the lights that seemed to flash in
every room, chills crawled up and down his spin. He grabbed his cane, opened
the door and stepped out without a second thought. Slamming the door behind
him, he spoke over his shoulder, “Are you sure you wanna be here?”
“Don’t worry about me, you do what you do, and I’ll tend to the other.” The
old man spat.
“Suit yourself, but it looks like it’s gonna get ugly.”
Emmanuel walked up the steps to the house, stopping on the porch. Jacob fol-
lowed behind him, knocking on the door, and lowering his head.
“What did you see in there?” Emmanuel said when a woman opened the door
with a baby in her hand. Her eyes were wide, face covered in sweat, hair sticking
to it as though it wasn’t the dead of winter.
“Come in, come in.” She repeated, stepping aside and letting the two of them
enter.
“Someone’s been naughty.” Emmanuel said, looking around the room. The
coffee table was over turned, all its contents scattered across the room. All the
couches were pressed together against the wall. The television was on its side.
“Oh yeah, someone has been sticking their hands where they don’t belong.”
A child materialized in front of Emmanuel, his laughter seemed to echo
through the house, though only he could hear it. He looked down on the child
with great reverence and respect. He stood there silently, as though the child had
been speaking though his lips never moved.
“I understand Father.” As Emmanuel completed his sentence, the child van-
ished.
Emmanuel reached into a pocket on his white shirt, pulling out a white chalk,
and begun to draw a circle on the center of the livingroom floor. He divided the
circle in half, and then the half of it he divided in half. “Get them in the circle.”
He said, as he began to draw symbols around the circle.
 Daniel Vega 5

Jacob took the woman’s arm and walked into the circle, the woman appeared
safe in his embrace. Emmanuel turned and crushed the chalk in his hand, and
begun whispering under his breath. Taking his cane, he brought it down to the
floor three times, the floor seemed to vibrate from the impact.
“My name is Emmanuel, son of Eleggua, I demand that you come from the
shadow and show yourself!” His words echoed with a great intensity through the
house, and just then the couches begun to shake against the wall. He looked over
in time to see the couch slide across the floor in the direction of Jacob and the
woman, she clinched Jacob in fear, though the couch seemed to stop suddenly as
though it hit an unseen wall. She looked down and noticed it stopped just at the
edge of the circles drawn on the floor.
The other coach slides across the room in Emmanuel’s direct, he brought his
cane down against the floor and it stopped suddenly.
“Your tricks do not frighten me.” Emmanuel laughed out loud as he spoke,
Jacob felt chills run through him from Emmanuel’s laughter. “Chango, I call to
you to burn the obstacles before me with fire.” He struck his cane down. “Oya, I
call to you. Carry these spirits to your home, bring them to the light so that they
may find peace.” He struck his cane down again, pictures on the wall begun to
raddle, dishes off in the kitchen begun to clatter, the sound of people running
could be heard on the second floor. “Father, open the door to remove these spir-
its, and bring peace back to this home.” He struck his cane down a third time, a
woman seemed to appear a foot away from him.
The woman holding onto Jacob froze in terror, Jacobs knees seemed to buckle
from the site before them. The woman that appeared was pale, with long hair.
Her eyes seemed to cry out her hatred for them all, her hands covered in blood,
stomach cut from one side to the other. As she stood there, motionless, her intes-
tines seemed to fall out of her stomach and onto the floor. Her hands began to
reach into the wound and pull them out slowly.
“Why are you here?” Emmanuel demand. “Speak spirit.”
“To kill them.” The voice was shrill, and blunt. Though it was heard by all, it
appeared to be spoken directly into all theirs minds, sound never reaching their
ears.
“Who are you here to kill?” Emmanuel asked. “Who sent you here?”
“The devil!” the woman answered, laughter could be heard throughout the
entire house. Emmanuel looked around as the shrill laughter echoed about him,
when he turned back the woman was gone.
Emmanuel turned to Jacob and approached him, holding out his hand, Jacob
gave him a bag he had been carrying. He took it directly to the kitchen, no light
6 The Palo Muerto

would turn on for him as he flipped the switches. Grabbing a glass bowl and fill-
ing it with water, he emptied the contents of the bag on the counter top. There
were strange relics, rosaries, more of that chalk he had used earlier, and other
strange things. He selected the rosary and placed it within the water, then silently
chanted over it. He grabbed some small white candles and lined them on the
counter top.
“Go to the car Jacob, and bring me the box.” He said, still fiddling with his
relics. “Be careful, she’s a lot more powerful then she looks, mind your beads and
your Cascarillia.”
Jacob held his hand to his chest, feeling the beads he had been wearing under
his collared shirt, taking some of the chalk off the counter he crushed it in his
hand, before turning and running from the kitchen. Emmanuel continues to pre-
pare himself, catching a movement from the corner of his eyes he turned, to see a
man face to face with him.
The man was tall and dark, his face was covered in blood, his body seemed
twisted and abnormal, almost inhuman. It stared straight into Emmanuel’s eyes,
spit seemed to dribble out of its mouth, its teeth were green and spaced out
through its mouth with its misshaped jaw. The air seemed to escape from the
room, and heat flooded in, along with the aroma of death.
Emmanuel grabbed the chalk from the counter top, quickly crushing a little in
his hand, he blew it in the man’s face. Surprised from Emmanuel’s quick actions
he stumbled backwards, then disappeared as though it was never there. Jacob
stumbled back into the kitchen, holding a box in his hands, wholes punched all
through its side.
“We have a small problem, my friend.” Emmanuel said, taking the box from
Jacob and putting it on the counter top. “It seems this spirit isn’t alone. This is
some very powerful voodoo.”
“How powerful?” Jacob asked, his eyes shifting around the room for answers.
“Whom has knowledge enough to call these things?”
“Someone who doesn’t care about you or your family.” Emmanuel said, slid-
ing his hand through a small opening on the top of the box. He fumbled inside it
for a moment, attempting to take hold of something that had been moving. He
pulled his hands out, holding onto a white dove. “The water.”
Jacob grabbed the bowl of water and held it out, Emmanuel dunked the head
of the dove in the water and nodded his head at his old friend.
“Be on guard, do not listen to them.” He said, noticing the sweat developing
on the old mans brows. “These are creatures from the other side. You are very
educated of them. Do not treat them any different.”
 Daniel Vega 7

Jacob nodded, taking a deep breath, he looks in Emmanuel’s eyes and begun
to speak in a foreign language. Suddenly his voice rose and fell, to a rhythm. His
words becoming a chat, Emmanuel began to speak this language with his com-
panion. Jacob exited the kitchen, dipping his hand into the water and sprinkling
it on the walls and the floor as they headed to the stairs. The woman stood within
the cycle still, holding her baby. Her breathing was frantic while tears streamed
down her face.
Jacob lead the way up the stairs to the second floor, the stench of death was
overwhelming,
Voices seemed to come from everywhere, whispering things that couldn’t be
understood. Jacob proceeded to the front bedroom, pushing the door open and
pausing for a minute, his chanting quickly becoming mumbled.
There in the room, draped over a disemboweled body was the female spirit.
She reaches into its stomach pulling out entrails and sinking her teeth into them.
She looked up at the two and laughed, blood staining her lips and cheeks. Jacob
quickly shut his eyes and sprinkled water in the room, his chanting rasing.
Emmanuel stepped into the room, his hand holding the dove so that its wings
were outstretched but its body was contained. He began to chant louder, holding
the dove out, its wing brushing up and down the walls as he passed the bird over
it. Jacob opened his eyes, and to his satisfaction, the woman was no longer there.
He reached in his pocket and pulled out a small white candle. Lighting it, he
placed it on the window ledge to the room, the two exited together.
Jacob lead the way to the next door, sprinkling the water and chanting as he
did. They opened the second room door and repeated the process. After the can-
dle was lite, they proceeded into the bathroom. Jacob opened the door and
entered, Emmanuel watched as Jacob walked through a woman that had been
hanging from the ceiling. He looked up at the dead body, fully aware that it too,
had been a spirit.
Though Jacob could not see it, Emmanuel’s unique gift of sight allowed him
to see that it was there. He turned his attention back to his duty, when the
corpse’s arm reached out and attempted to grab Jacob’s neck as though to stran-
gle him. Its hands passed through him, as though neither were there.
Jacobs eyes went wide as he placed his free hand to his chest. Emmanuel
watches as small colorful beads fell to the floor from under Jacob’s shirt.
“Don’t worry about it.” Emmanuel said. “Keep your prayers.”
They continued through the upper level, performing their spiritual cleansing,
then continuing down to the first floor. Emmanuel ignored the image of the
deformed man, as he stood before the woman and her baby within the circle. He
8 The Palo Muerto

lounged at her, taunting her, though was unable to pass his presence beyond the
circle. He continued the cleansing, Jacob leading the way through the house,
until they reached the back door of the first floor.
Emmanuel opened the door and released the dove, it flapped its wings to fly
away, but suddenly stopped flapping and fell to the ground dead. He approached
the box on the counter top, and pulled out another white dove. He turned to
Jacob, and dipped the head of the dove in the water, then nodded his head for
him to continue.
They proceeded to the basement continuing the cleansing, Emmanuel shows
strain from the mental battle he been undergoing. After finishing in the lower
level, they walked back upstairs, walking straight fast to the front door. After
opening it, Emmanuel whispered in this strange language and released the bird. It
flew, vanishing quickly into the sky.
“Get the Eleggua and set him up behind the door.” He said, turning to Jacob.
“We’ll feed him, so he can protect the house. No need to worry though, those
spirits are gone now.”
Jacob ran outside, and Emmanuel approached the woman within the circle.
“What is your name Miss?” he asked, remembering that he had never been
properly introduced.
“Mary.” She answered, looking completely exhausted. “Is it over?”
“Just about.” He answered with a smile on his face. “If you are worried about
those spirits, you don’t need to. They are half way back to where they belong by
now, but we need to remove any energy they left on you and your child. Once
that’s finished, we’ll place some protection around your house, and you, and
you’ll never have to worry about this happening again.”
He turned away from her, attempting to head back to the kitchen where he
left his belongings, when she took hold of his arm. He looked over his shoulder,
seeing the concern and fear in her eyes.
“How could something like this happen?” she asked. “I’ve always been taught
that when you die, you go to either heaven or hell. Were those demons?”
“Close enough Mary.” He answered. “You’ve lived so much of your life
blinded by what people wanted you to believe. Now you were exposed to the
truth, but I assure you, that is the dark side of it. This is not how it was meant to
be.” He lowered his head, almost appearing to be ashamed of what had happened
in this house, when he rose his head, the anger reflected in his eyes. “People learn
this for the wrong reasons, and it teaches people to fear us. Don’t remember the
evil you’ve seen today Mary, I beg you. Remember the good that came and drove
those evils away.”
 Daniel Vega 9

It took nearly three hours to have the house back in order, and Emmanuel sat
on the couch, amazed that it had changed back into a humble home. The
couches were placed one against the wall across from the door, the other on the
wall right of it. The Television was on, and right side up, all the pictures straight
on the wall. A coffee table rested in the center of the room, and all the lights were
well lite within the room.
Emmanuel looked at a statue that sat atop the coffee table. At first glance it
seemed a bit frightening, a crude cement head, a spike atop it. Red and black
beads were wrapped around it. Candy rested on a dish to its side. Emmanuel
smiled and lite a cigar he had been holding in his hand, and after a few puffs,
blew smoke on it.
“This is Eleggua, Mary.” Emmanuel explained. Jacob seated just right of her,
the small child sleeping soundly now. “He is a very powerful deity, one that
deserves a great deal of respect. It is because of him, that today, we were able to
drive those spirits from your home. He allowed me to do this, gave me the
strength, and was here to protect us all. Place him behind your door, and he will
make sure that nothing evil will enter your house again.”
The two men rose to their feet and bid the lady farewell. After getting in the
car and beginning their ride home, Jacob broke the silence.
“Who could have done this?”
“I don’t know.” Said Emmanuel. “I couldn’t help but feel a connection to
someone, but I don’t know of anyone in the US that possess such knowledge in
the Ekon.”
“Ekon?” Jacob repeated.
“This is powerful African voodoo.” Emmanuel explained. “Those spirits were
sent there on purpose. Whoever sent them, fed them well. Eleggua and Oshun
were there with us, and I could feel their disgust for that evil act. My heart goes
out to the one that did this. It won’t be easy to get back in Eleggua’s good
graces.”
“But he allowed it to happening in the first place.” Jacob said with distaste.
“He’s the one that gives permission for all work to be done.”
“Very true, Old Friend.” Said Emmanuel. “But remember. Eleggua has many
paths, many sides. Some of his aspects are evil, and some are good. Someone
knows this well enough to seek out his worst side, and provoke powerful spirits.
God I just wish that I had a clue. I’ll seek answers in the morning though, you
just be sure to cleanse yourself when you get home. You took a powerful hit in
there to break your Elekes.”
10 The Palo Muerto

Jacobs’ hand went to his neck, feeling the emptiness, where his beads once
were.
“I’ll get more.” Jacob said. “They did what they were supposed to do, right?”
“Who knows what that spirit truly had intended for you?” Emmanuel said. “I
wish she had succeeded though, maybe then I can finish watching my shows in
peace.”
Jacob chuckled to his joke, driving steadily until he reached Emmanuel’s
home. They said their good byes and Emmanuel exited the car, walking up the
steps to his house. He looked to his television, realizing that he left it on the
entire time.
“Ugh, no wonder my electricity bill is always so high.” He said to himself,
pulling his shirt off and proceeding to the second floor. He throws his shirt in his
hamper, and turn his shower on. Opening his medicine cabinet he pulled out
some more of that strange chalk, Cascarillia, and crushed it into a cup. He lifted a
small container, which read “holy water” and emptied it in the glass. He finished
undressing and jumped into the shower, after which he took the glass and poured
it down his head.
He got out, grabbing a white towel and dabbing the water off, evidence of the
chalk was clearly visible all over his body. He wrapped his towel around him and
went to his room, grabbing some shorts and a shirt and throwing them on. Sit-
ting on his bed, he opened a drawer at the bottom of his bed and pulled out some
white socks and put them on. He turned to face the front wall of his room, where
candles illuminated a large alter.
There were several large-covered bowls resting on this altar, of many different
colors. Behind each were large statues of catholic saints, flowers, fans, and other
things. He smiled at his altar, crossing his hands and patting his chest he nodded
and said, “Alafia.”
He pulled the covers off his bed and laid down, turning his light off, with a
sense of relief that his day was over, he closed his eyes and fell fast asleep.

Jacob pulled his car up in front of his house, parked his Oldsmobile and cut
off the engine. He sat there silently for a moment, enjoying the silence and peace
that Northeastern Philadelphia provides. He stepped out of his car, walking up
the walk way to his more expensive home. “Sometimes you have to pay for a little
piece of mind.” He told himself when he bought this house. He was far enough
away from all the high crime areas of the city, and yet still close enough to get
there if he was needed.
 Daniel Vega 11

Jacob stood at a small home bar, pouring Jack Daniels into a glass. He guzzled
it down right away, then poured another, before walking across his carpeted livin-
groom and sitting on his couch. He rubbed his brow and breathed a sign of relief,
sipping from the cup and raising his feet onto his coffee table. He rubbed at his
neck, trying to seek the comforter of the relics’ he once wore, knowing how
defenseless he was at this time. He turned his head and looked to the cement
head that rested behind his door, his Eleggua, feeling comfortable he was not
entirely alone.
After sipping the cup until there was nothing left in it, he put the cup on the
coffee table and walked to the kitchen. He smiled, looking at a TV dinner inside
of his refrigerator and pulled it out, ripping the box open, and placing it in the
microwave with the timer set for three minutes. He turned around, freezing in his
tracks, placing his hand over his heart.
Standing before him was the same spirit he saw in the house. She stood there,
naked, her bowls falling to the floor, body covered in her own blood. Her hair
draped over her shoulders, and part of her face. He clearly saw one of her eyes,
and half of her mouth, drool dripping from her lips.
He fell to one knee as she walked toward him, covering the distance with a
supernatural speed. She turned around and lay on the floor next to him, looking
up at his pale face. She kicked her feet in a childish manner, clapping her hands as
she did, laughing with joy at the old mans pain.
“What’s seems to be the problem, Jacob?” she asked, her voice seemed more
masculine, almost devilish. “I feel you slipping away. Where are your precious
Orisha?”
She seemed to flip over onto her knees as though she could manipulate gravity
itself. She crawled on her hands and knees, turning her body around to mock the
position of Jacob, face to face.
“You can go to hell.” Jacobs voice was soft, short of air. He reached into his
pocket, feeling the chalk there. He wrapped his fingers around it and pulled it
out.
Her mouth went wide, as did her eyes, though it was clear she was mocking
him. A smile crept over her face, and she rose on her knees and clapped her hands
together, giggling as she did.
“You fool.” She laughed. “The one that sent me gave me great power. Your
instruments won’t work now.”
“We defeated you once.” He said. “I’ll defeat you again.”
12 The Palo Muerto

It only took the blink of an eye for her to lean forward on her hands and
knees, her spiritual form allowed her to manipulate herself in this fashion, with
her lips nearly pressed to Jacob’s ear.
“You don’t have Emmanuel to save you this time.” She said. Her lips spread
apart, showing her teeth as though she was prepared to bite him, then she parted
her teeth and released a growl from her mouth. Like a lion’s roar, the walls
vibrated from her growl, Jacob squeezed at his heart and fell onto his chest, grasp-
ing for air.
She shifted her body to sit on Jacobs body, mounting him, placing her hands
at each side of his head she gazed into his eyes face to face. His face went long, his
body frozen in fear.
“Your family will follow.” She tried to whisper, but her voice seemed to give
off two separate voices at once. “The woman will go next. I will take her myself.
The child, his blood I will feast on! Now I will carry your soul back to the one
that sent me. We will have your soul fight against your own friend. Yes, you will
be the one to stop Emmanuel.”
Jacob felt a cold pain rip through his body, his air escaped his lungs, he looked
down to see the ghostly hands phasing through his chest. He felt the stabbing
sensation, his left arm running numb, unable to move he tried desperately to call
out to the only one he knew could save him.
“Ele…” but his life gave in instead.

Emmanuel stepped out onto his porch, looking up and down the block, see-
ing a young man standing on the corner. He was a tall young man, with pierces
through his eye brow, chin, and ears. He was light skin, and clearly Hispanic.
With a closer look, he saw the same color strained of beads around the kid’s neck.
Red and black. These are the colors of Eleggua.
He stepped off his porch, watching as another young man approached the kid
on the corner, he looked in their direction just in time to catch a glimpse of what
appeared to be a drug sale. After the exchange, the young man with the beads
stayed there, while the other walked off. Emmanuel looked as he saw a figure of a
tall man with a dark complexioned appear behind the kid. The figure was strong
and proud, with a gold chain and crown standing there, shaking his head in dis-
approval. Emmanuel felt a connection to this figure, both protective and power-
ful, knowing exactly who the figure was. Chango
Emmanuel approached the young man, standing beside him, enjoying the
bewildered look upon his face.
“Whatcha doing out here?” Emmanuel asked, looking up and down the block.
 Daniel Vega 13

“Whatcha need, nigga?” The kid snapped, Emmanuel noticed the kids’ con-
nection to the street immediately.
“I need you to do one of two things.” Emmanuel stepped closer to the kid,
poking his finger into his chest as he spoke. “You can either remove those Elekes
from your neck, or put me in the position to remove them from you.”
“What the fuck is you saying, son!” the kids’ face distorted in anger, lifting his
shirt he exposed the handle of a .38. “Roll out, nigga! I ain’t tryna catch a case off
your bitch ass!”
Emmanuel reached over and took hold of the beads on the kids’ neck, snap-
ping them off. The kids’ eyes opened wide as he reached for his gun. Emmanuel
stood there, watching and waiting, no emotion reflected on his face, he watched
as the kid rose the gun leveled to his head. The kid stood there, shifting his
weight from one leg to the other, nervous, breathing heavily.
“What are you going to do with that?” Emmanuel felt a gentle touch to the
palm of his hand, knowing that his Orisha was standing at his side. He heard
whispers in his ears, and words come to his mind. “You have a friend. His name
is Chris. He’s tall, with a tattoo of the Virgin Mary on his right arm. Today you
will meet him, and you will leave with him. Have fun, because after today, you
will never see him again. You will be left with two choices. Your first choice is,
you can follow him to his death, or, you can choice to live!”
The kids’ arm seemed heavy, the gun lowered, now pointing to Emmanuel’s
stomach, their eyes still staring into each others.
“If you choose life, if you truly want to escape from this lifestyle, June, then
come to me.” The kids’ eyes widened as Emmanuel mentioned his name, and he
immediately saw the Elekes on the Santero’s neck. “You have a beautiful gift
that’s been causing you confusion. You’re sleepless nights, your dreams, those
thoughts that come to you, telling you to do things that seem right but difficult.
Those are all caused because you are refusing to accept who and what you are. I
have a feeling we will meet again.”
Emmanuel placed his hand on the kids’ gun and lowered it to his side. “Even
if you wanted to pull this trigger, you wouldn’t have been able to hurt me. When
you are ready, you will understand.”
Emmanuel turned and begun walking back to his car, the kid looked around,
startled and confused before shouting out, “You’re the real deal uh?” He tucked
the gun back into his pants. “What about Chris, what can I do?”
“You have to let fate run its coarse.” Emmanuel shouted over his shoulder.
“We are all connected to it, but some of us understand it enough to make good of
our time. You would be wise to do the same.”
14 The Palo Muerto

Emmanuel closed the door to his Buick, looking out the window in time to
see the kid run off. He looked at his passenger seat and seen the child, Eleggua
seated there.
“It’s never easy.” He said to the child.
“But the ends will justify the means.” The child’s voice spoke into his mind.
“Now you must prepare yourself for the unexpected. You must go to Jacob.”
Emmanuel signed, looking out the windshield, then turned back. The child
was gone. He turned the car on and drove, his thoughts focused on his old friend.

21 Years Ago
The bedroom seemed dimmed, though the room’s light had been more then ade-
quate. Emmanuel stood in the doorway, young and full of questions, just turning
6. His mother sat on the bed, a steaming bowl of soup in her hands. She blew on
it to cool it, then tried spoon feeding her husband, who had been ill.
Her eyes appeared heavy, from both tears and lack of sleep. The man’s face
was pale, with a look that suggested he was disconnected from the world. She
placed the bowl on the bed side table as the phone rang, and answered it.
“Hello?” she answered. “He’s still sick. The doctors don’t know what’s wrong
with him. I have to take him to get a cat scan in the morning.”
Emmanuel looked over at his father, fears filling his heart. He loved his father
dearly, though it wasn’t the man on the bed that frightened him. It was the figure
he was looking at, hovering over him. It was dark, seeming to absorb the light
itself, nothing more then a skeleton wrapped in a black cloak which seemed to
spread out across the room. Its whispers spoke into his father’s mind, words of
fear, despair, hopelessness, and death.
Emmanuel heard these words in his mind, overhearing this creature’s mad-
ness. He felt a touch to his side, soothed by the image of a child, one he did not
quite understand. This child had always been there, though he seemed to be the
only one that could see him. Always filled with words of wisdom, always full of
fun, and always been a figure of protection for him.
“Go to your father.” The child spoke to Emmanuel. “Go to him and place
your hand on his head.”
“No!” Emmanuel protested. “Look at that thing. It’s scary! I don’t want it to
see me.”
“He can’t hurt you.” The child answered with a smile. “I’ll protect you from
it, you just have to listen to me and do exactly as I say.”
“Who are you talking to?” the woman asked, hanging up the phone and look-
ing at Emmanuel staring at his side. “What’s wrong dear? You can’t sleep”
 Daniel Vega 15

Emmanuel looked at his mother. Tears forming in her eyes. She tried to
approach him when his lips began to move. She stopped to listening, but nothing
came out. As she strained, she began to hear her sons voice raising, a child bab-
bling she assumed.
“Honey, what’s wrong.” She asked again.
Emmanuel focused on the child’s words, it was difficult to speak at first, but
after he figured out the rhythm, he continued his chanting. His mother stared at
him, but only heard the words of encouragement coming from his invisible
friend.
“That’s it, Emmanuel, you’re doing it.” The child spoke with a smile upon his
face. “Now go and put your hand on your father’s head.”
“What are you doing Honey?” Emmanuel’s mother watched her son walk
across the room, his eyes seemed not fixed on anything but his father. He
stretched out his hand, his voice filled the room with a sound, similar to a prayer,
though not in any language she knew. “Honey. Honey, leave your father sleep.”
Emmanuel seen his mother, darkness seemed to spread across the room, she
fading away into it. He saw her lips moving just before the darkness fell, but he
couldn’t make out her words. He felt a surge flowing through him, passing from
his body, through his hand, and into his father. His words, though not anything
in his common language, he seemed to now understand.
The darkness seemed to suck back into the creature that was hoovering over
his father, the child still speaking words into Emmanuel’s mind which was then
repeated. The fear swept away, Emmanuel’s eyes locked onto the floating skele-
ton, his words now seemed directed at him.
“Dear God! Dear God!” his mother repeated, feeling chills creep up and down
her body. She gasped looking to her husband, her son’s small hand on his fore-
head, now moving for the first time in months. She could hear him attempting to
speak, though it seemed as though he was waking from a dream. Her son contin-
ued chanting, looking at the ceiling as though there was something there, some-
thing that he detested.
“Tell it, Emmanuel, say it!” The Child encouraged.
“I am Emmanuel, Son of Eleggua, I demand that you return to he who sent
you.” Emmanuel heard the child speaking, felt his protection, heard his words of
encouragement. “Oya, I call to you, sweep this spirit to its home! Chango, give
my father the strength to overcome this creature, and burn it away as if by fire.
Eleggua, give me your strength and remove this evil upon my father.”
Emmanuel outreached his head to the skeleton, he could hear its screams and
protests as a woman appeared. She was beautiful, with colorful flowing robes.
16 The Palo Muerto

Her tone was dark, her eyes seemed to burn with both power and love. Another
figure appeared, this time, a man. Tall and dark, with gold chains and a crown on
his head. The two figures stared at the skeleton, their presence striking fear inside
of it.
Emmanuel seemed to lose control of his body, felt something become a part of
him. He began to hear a drumming sound behind him, a music which seemed to
entice him. He relaxed and was amazed as his body began to move, dancing to a
beat only he could hear. His voice now filled the house with a musical chanting.
Peace filled his mind.
“What’s going on Baby?” his mother cried out, her tears streaming down her
cheeks, fears overcoming her. She tried to get close to her son, but something
wouldn’t allow her to do so.
Emmanuel’s body seemed to stop, turning to face the skeleton, his legs shak-
ing, as though part of a dance. His hands out stretched to the skeleton, he felt
something coming out of him. Suddenly a man jumped from within him,
directly to the skeleton. It grabbed the hovering creature and the two of them
seemed to struggle with one another, floating around each other. The two other
spirits seemed to hoover over to the battle and begin to take part of it, the mass of
floating spirits drifting to the window.
Emmanuel’s foot rose and came down hard upon the ground. “Depart!” he
heard himself shout out, the window shattered as the spirits burst through it. His
fathers turned his head as Emmanuel fell to his knees, sweat beading down his
forehead.
“What happened?” the man asked, sitting up in bed.
His mother made the symbol of the cross, and fell to her knees, pressing her
hands together in prayer. Her tears continued to fall down her cheeks and after a
moment, she rose to her feet and lay on the bed beside her husband. Her arms
wrapped around him, pulling him in tight.
“Are you okay?” he asked, a bit confused.
“I’m okay now.” She answered, looking through teary eyes at her son, still
kneeling on the floor. She backed away from her husband, slides off the bed,
kneeling next to her son. “Baby, what just happened?”
“We chased away the evil ghost, mommy.” He answered, looking up with a
smile. He looked normal, though exhausted. “Eleggua says that he won’t be back.
He said that Daddy is going to be okay.”
“Did I miss something?” his father asked.
“Your son just saved your life.”
 2

Emmanuel pulled up in front of Jacobs’ house, parking behind Jacobs’ Oldsmo-

bile. He got out of the car and walked over to the house. He knocked, and waited
briefly.
“Jacob!” he called out, hoping the old man would hear him. “Jacob!”
Emmanuel walked over to the window beside the door and looked through,
but didn’t see his old friend. He reached in his pocket and pulled out his keys,
finding the key to Jacobs’ house. He walked over to the door, unlocking it and
opening the door. He looked inside, and seen a woman, standing there waiting
for him.
He knew this image well, another Orisha that stood by his side his enter life,
Oya, in her colored robes. Her cheeks wet with tears, and her words spoke into
his mind.
“He is with me now.” She spoke, then faded away.
“No!” Emmanuel protested.
He ran into the house screaming the Old Mans’ name, first half way up the
steps then back down. He ran into the kitchen, stopping suddenly, over come
with grief instantly.
“No!” he shouted! “No!”
He knelt down beside the old man, propping his head onto his lap. The old
man’s body was already stiff. He caressed his face, rocking back and forth, his
body shaking with sorrow.
“Jacob.” His name choked in his throat. “You can’t leave me! Not now!”

- 17 -
18 The Palo Muerto

The breeze pierced through Emmanuel, sitting on Jacobs steps watching as the
paramedics hoisted his body onto the ambulance. The sun reflected off the tears
that streamed down his face. He lowered his head into his hands, unable to hold
back the frog in his throat, and released his sorrow. Feeling a gentle touch to his
shoulder, he turned to see Eleggua. The child stood straight, his long hair flowing
over his shoulders, his red and black robe not affected by the breeze. His face was
strong, though his expression was sad.
Emmanuel straightened up his posture, hearing the words of his spiritual
father clearly in his mind.
“He is with us now.”
It was clear that Eleggua was disgusted, which puzzled Emmanuel. Under-
standing immediately that there were forces at work, he rose and walked past the
police officer at the door. Police officers were in the house, jotting in their pads,
but that didn’t hold his attention. Stopping in the kitchen, Emmanuel reached
his hand out to the microwave and gently passed his fingers across the buttons.
“What are you doing sir?” asked the police officer, looking at Emmanuel.
“I’m trying to find out what happened here.” Emmanuel said, not turning to
face the police officer. “The last thing my friend touched was this…”
Emmanuel froze, his sentence falling short. He gasped, as the events that took
place only hours ago, flash through his mind. His breath faltered, he raised his
free hand to his heart, clenching it as though he was in pain. He let go of the
microwave, and fell to one knee, where his friend had passed away at. He fell
onto his back, his eyes looking through the ceiling, he saw the spirit that haunted
him, that brought his old friend to his end.
Emmanuel slowly rose to his feet, the tears streaming down his face even
harder now. Leaning heavily on the counter top, the police officer stood in front
of him with his mouth wide opened.
“You’re one of them psychic guys, ain’t you?” the police officer asked. “I read
about what you just did, you’re clairvoyant, ain’t you?”
“I’m something else.”
Emmanuel walked from the kitchen, to the front porch, resting against the
wall. Images of the spirit still flashed in his mind, he could feel the pain his friend
endured. He felt the hopelessness he suffered, and felt his death. He’s pain
became uncontrollable Unable to hold back his anger, he began beating his fist
against the wall.
“This will not help you.” The voice was soft, yet powerful enough to break
through his anger. “You should be preparing yourself. You have a mission ahead
of you. You must right this evil, do our will, bring peace to Jacob.”
 Daniel Vega 19

Emmanuel turned to his side, seeing the beautiful woman in gold robes. The
sight of her was enough to raise any mans spirit, her appearance was one of flaw-
less beauty. He knew his spiritual mothers face, and crossing his hands across his
chest, he lowered his head.
“What am I preparing myself against Oshun?” he asked her.
“You will know when the time comes.” She answered, her words heard within
his mind. “Know that this will not be an easy battle, but we will be here. All of us
will be. We will never leave your side.”

Emmanuel staggered onto his steps, a bottle of Southern Comforted in his

hand. He turned and sat down on his top step, twisting the cap off the bottle, and
drinking heavily from it. The light from the moon gleamed off his puffy red eyes.
The tears he had spent had made an impression on his appearance. He turned the
cap back on the bottle and placed it on the ground next to him.
“Oh Jacob.” He said aloud. “My old friend, you deserve your peace. I know
there is a great reward for you on the other side. From all the battles we fought
together, all the right we brought about, it’s your time to reap the rewards.”
“Yo.” The voice came from the bottom of the step, Emmanuel looked to see
the young man from earlier in the day. He was pacing in his place, his eyes
reflecting the same pain as Emmanuel. “How did you know yo?”
“You’re not ready for that answer kid.” Emmanuel attempted to quickly dis-
miss the young man.
“That’s bullshit!” he snapped. “How the fuck did you know.”
Emmanuel looked down at the kid, he could see the curiosity and pain, he
thought to attempt to provide some comfort. Waving his hand, the kid ran up
the stairs, and sat down beside him.
“Have a seat.” Emmanuel picked up the bottle and pressed it against the kid’s
chest. “You’re gonna need it.”
The kid looked at the bottle, half full, and turns the cap off. He turned the
bottle upside down, swallowing the burning liquid as though he had been drink-
ing for years. He lowered it and put the cap back on.
“You were right. Chris wouldn’t wait for me.” The kid said, his eyes welling
up. “I told him over the phone to wait, I knew them South Philly mother fuckers
were strapped. I told him to wait for me, this wouldn’t have happened if he just
waited.”
“No, you would both be dead June.” Emmanuel said. “The only certainty, in
your way of life, is an early death. What did your friend accomplish in his young
20 The Palo Muerto

life? How long do you think it will take before his name vanishes on these
streets?”
June turned his head, looking in Emmanuel’s eyes.
“That’s the problem with you kids. You want something that doesn’t belong
to you.” Emmanuel picked up the bottle and drunk from it. “I was young. I
know what it’s like to be tempted to do the wrong thing, maybe even better then
you. I know something you don’t know yet. When my time comes, I won’t have
any regrets, no unfinished business. You’re not the only one that lost someone
today.”
“What happened?” June asked, a puzzled look upon his face. “Didn’t you
know it was gonna happen?”
“No.” Emmanuel answered, his voice hinting at his pain. “That’s not how this
gift works. We all are bound by a fate, June. That doesn’t mean that something is
meant to happen at a certain time in your life. Fate is, the lessons we choose to
learn in our journey of life. When we learn all that we came here to learn, our
spirit raises, back to the source. Not even a Santero like I can change those lessons
but, if I’m evil, I can prevent you from finishing that fate.”
“So, it was meant for Chris to die?” June asked.
“Yes.” Said Emmanuel. “I can’t tell you what he was here to learn June, but I
can tell you that it was his time to go. You have to embrace the idea that he
wasn’t taken before his time, because that would have meant that his soul would
never be at peace.”
“How did you know though?” June asked. “How did you know him, how do
you know me? How did you know he was going to die today?”
“I was born with a gift.” Emmanuel explained. “I prefer to call it a curse. I’m
giving information from the messenger of God, I know things he wants me to
know. I can see all things that are spiritual, whether it is good or evil in nature.
It’s my duty to fight away these evil forces, and help people come to the Orisha.”
“That sounds like some crazy shit.” June said, forcing a laugh. “What did you
see today? When I was on the corner, why did you come to me and tell me what
you did?”
“Because you were meant to hear it.” Emmanuel said. He lifted the bottle to
his lips and drunk it dry. “You have time to change June. Don’t waste it, there’s a
fulfilling life waiting for you if you want it.”
Emmanuel rose to his feet and turned to his door.
“I want it!” June stood up, and turned to Emmanuel. “I wanna know what
you know, I wanna be able to see things like you do.”
 Daniel Vega 21

“This shit must be hitting you fast.” Emmanuel said, looking at the bottle.
“You’re asking for something you don’t understand yet.”
“My grandmother taught me when I was younger, she gave me those Elekes
you broke.” June said. “I’ve always known what they were, and she told me I had
this gift. Up until now, I never believed it, but I do now! Teach me yo. I’ll do
whatever it takes to learn, just help me, I don’t wanna end up like Chris did.”
Emmanuel stood there for a moment, looking at June. He could see the deter-
mination in his eyes, and the passion. He heard a whisper come to his ear, and a
small smile spread across his face.
“Okay.” Emmanuel said. “Tomorrow, I want you here, at my door at 10:00
a.m.”
“Damn yo, why so fucking early.” June protested.
“All right, then I guess you really don’t want this.” Emmanuel turned to his
door.
“Okay.” June said, shaking his head. “I’ll be here.”
He turned and started walking down the steps, Emmanuel watched.
“June.” He called. “That shit in your pockets, get rid of it.”
June nodded and turned around, Emmanuel smiled as he saw the young man
shaking his head in disapproval, throwing two small bags in the garbage can,
before running off.

Thunder seemed to clap in Emmanuel’s ears, squinting as the light seemed to

cut into his eyes. He heard the thunder again, this time louder. Looking out the
window he could see nothing but the sun shining in the clear sky. He looked
around, noticing that he was on his couch, the thunder clapping in his ears was a
pounding at the door.
“What!” he shouted, sliding off the couch, his head throbbing from his long
night of drinking. “Whatever you’re selling, I don’t want any.”
The knocking came harder this time, as though the person on the other side
was attempting to wake the dead. Emmanuel rose to his feet, approached the
door, swung it opened. “What do you want?” he shouted.
“Damn, mother fucker. You told me to be here all early, and you still sleep-
ing.” June said, looking Emmanuel up and down. “I ain’t even get any sleep.”
“Oh, that’s right.” Emmanuel said, walking away from the door and leaving it
opened. “Come in.”
June stepped into the house, his eyes darting around the room, falling to the
three bottles of Jack Daniels at the side of the couch. “You were getting it in,
damn.”
22 The Palo Muerto

“Give me a minute.” Emmanuel walked over to his steps. “Turn the TV on,
whatever you want, I’ll be down in a minute.”
“You could have told me to come over at 12:00” June rolled his eyes, and
shook his head. “He’s a mess.”
Emmanuel walked into his room, saluting his Orisha as he entered. He
grabbed some clothes, and headed into the bathroom. He could hear the televi-
sion downstairs. June immediately made himself at home. After his showered, he
dressed himself, and grabbed shells which he had on his alter. He walked down
the stairs stopping in front of the television.
“You ready?” he asked, June tossed the remote on the couch and sat up.
“Man, I been ready, why the hell you think I woke up so early.”
Emmanuel leads the way to the kitchen, opening the basement door. He
began walking down, June stood at the top a bit reluctant. “What’s the prob-
lem?” he asked looking up at the young man.
“I know there ain’t no crazy, satanic shit down there.” June said, his fear very
well visible. “Like, you not gonna kill no cats and shit, throw blood on me or no
weird shit like that?”
“If you don’t get your ass down here, June.” Emmanuel threatened, a chuckle
followed. “I’m a Santero, not a satanic cultist. Now come on down, you’ll see
what this is about.”
They both walked down the steps, in the center of the room was a small round
table, with a large clear bowl, surrounded by six glass goblets. They were filled
with water, a steel cross rested in the large bowl. The basement seemed cool, can-
dles shined on a table aside of large stones. Emmanuel walked over to the stones,
saluted, then turned and sat down on a chair in front of the bowl.
“Sit down.” Emmanuel pointed to the chair in front of the bowl. “I will read
you today, and tell you want’s going on in your life.”
June sat down, Emmanuel looked him up and down. He seemed curious yet
fearful. His eyes were wide opened, with an earring through his eye brow. His
hair was straight and neatly trim, with a goat tee groomed nicely. He had a light
complexion. The lack of sleep left a dark ring around his eyes. Emmanuel smiled
and shook the shells in his hand. He spoke in a strange language, pounded his fist
against the table, and dropped the shells.
He looked at them, then up at June. He smiled at him, the kid’s demeanor
seemed to lighten a little.
“You have a strong mind and spirit, though it seems that your biggest down-
fall is women.” Emmanuel said, the kid smiled, lowered his head then lift it. “You
 Daniel Vega 23

find yourself easily angered, and that anger is what drives you to fight everyone.
You have no self control over yourself.
“There is also a woman in your life that you gave your heart too, but she won’t
give you her heart in return. That seems to hurt more then anything, because you
know that you can have any other woman, but her.
“You have, for a long time, been able to avoiding the biggest of issues that
came before you. It’s almost as though you can feel when something bad is com-
ing, and this is good. Your dreams seemed to be forgotten, but they return and
with meaning, bringing a sense of understanding to situations you know you will
find yourself in.
“The fact of the matter is, you are a Chango. He is your head. You need to
know, love, and understand your spiritual father because it is he that has kept you
safe. He is the fight that’s in you. He is the romance in your life. He is more a
part of you then you know. Now it’s time that you begin to acknowledge him.”
“My grandmother once told me that I had Santa Barbara with me.” June said,
a little confused.
“They are one in the same.” Emmanuel answered. “See, this religion began in
Africa, and as far as we know, it’s a thousand years older than Christianity. When
the slave trade was in place, Spaniards raided Africa and took Practitioners and
Priests over to their lands as slaves. Africans were considered to be Ungodly peo-
ple, and believed to be without a soul, so their slave owners insisted that they
practice Christianity.
“The slaves wouldn’t turn their back to their faith, and were beaten and forced
to attend these Catholic churches, and it was there that this religion found a way
to survive. See, Catholics honor saints, each has their own appearance, there own
tales, some even have their own duties as a deity. So the slaves found that in these
figures were striking similarities between what they practiced and what the Span-
iards practiced.
“Your beloved Santa Barbara is a woman with a golden crown, holding a gold
cup, and a double edge sword. She’s always endowed in a red and white gar-
ments, and what they saw in her was Chango. Chango wears a golden crown, and
carries a double edge axe. A symbol of power which can create or destroy. Slaves
found it easy to pray in front of these figures, but in their hearts, they were hon-
oring the Orisha.”
“That’s some deep shit right there, yo.” June said, leaning up in his seat. “So
what do they believe to be God? I mean, what about heaven and hell?”
“God is known as Olofi. He is the creator, always creating.” Emmanuel
answered. “Heaven and Hell, well that’s just something that other religions use to
24 The Palo Muerto

control the masses through fear. There is a lot you have to learn, and all your
questions will not be answered right here. But what we will do, is help to remove
all the negativity from you, and put you on the path to learn. When you are
ready, then we will make it so that you can stand with the Orisha.”
Emmanuel walked to the stone altar, and reached behind it, pulling out strains
of those colorful beads. He pulled out one of the red and white, and another of
the blue and clear beads. He turned to the sink in his basement and washed out a
cup, then grabbed a small bottle of water from atop a shelf stretching over the
stone altar.
He poured the water in, then grabbed some red wine from the shelf, mixing
the two together. He dropped the beads inside of it, and grabbed a Cigar from his
pocket. After lighting it, he turns the cigar around so that the lite end was in his
mouth. He leaned over the cup, and blew the smoke in the glass three times.
June rose to his feet, walking over to Emmanuel, watching everything he was
doing. Emmanuel pulled some rum off the shelf, and poured it in his mouth,
then reached in the cup and pulled the beads out, spitting the rum out of his
mouth and over the beads. He dropped the beads back in the cup and turned to
June.
“You will wear these beads. They are to help keep you safe.” He explained.
“These are spiritual beads. In time I’ll give you the real Santero beads. Don’t dis-
respect the Orisha by doing anything unrighteous with them on. The Orisha are
righteous, and they want you to learn what it means to be righteous yourself.”
Emmanuel walked upstairs, returning in a few moments with two coconuts,
some Cascarillia, and white powder in a clear zip lock bag. He took the Cascaril-
lia and drew a circle on the floor. Then begun to draw the same symbols he used
before around it. He took June, and placed him in the center, then picked up the
coconuts.
“What we are going to do is a spiritual cleansing.” Emmanuel explained, and
scribbled on the coconut with the cascarillia until it was completely white. “I
want you to spin counter clockwise, and keep your hands in front of you opened
and palms up. During this time, I want you to curse out your enemies, anyone
you think is your enemy, and if a name just comes to your head, then the Orisha
are revealing enemies to you.
“Stop when I tell you too, and begin to spin clockwise. This time as you spin,
you will wish for the best for yourself. All that would make you happy, all that is
truly in your heart. If at anytime you feel anything strange, say so. Fear, happi-
ness, even if you feel like crying, tell me.”
 Daniel Vega 25

“Okay.” June agreed, his hands already out, opened and palms up. “I’m
ready.”
Emmanuel walked to June, with one of the two coconuts in his hand, com-
pletely white now from the cascarillia. “Start spinning.”
June begun to spin, Emmanuel waved the coconut in circles around the young
mans head, his lips moved in silent prayer, his words again in that foreign lan-
guage. He brought the coconut down June’s shoulder, to his hands, as though he
was brushing something off of him. He continued, until he began to brush off his
chest and back with the coconut, then down his legs. He could feel the coconut
getting heavy in his hands, as it collected all the negativity, and spirits that were
with June, which didn’t belong with him.
Emmanuel brought his foot down to the floor hard, shouting in prayer, he
placed the coconut down on the floor next to one of the symbols he had drawn
on the floor, and grabbed the rum he had used for the beads. He put some in his
mouth, and sprayed it out at June’s legs. He grabbed the other coconut, placing
the rum down, and lifted the cigar that was burning next to his altar.
“Stop.” He said, blowing smoke from the cigar. “Now spin clockwise, and
wish for the best.”
June begun to spin, and Emmanuel begun to do the same thing with the coco-
nut, the cigar held in his mouth.
“Yo.” June said, his legs shaking. “I feel weird. Light headed, and I can’t feel
my legs.”
“Its okay, keep spinning.” Emmanuel instructed him while continuing this
processes. June’s eyes rolled to the back of his head, and his lips begun to move,
though no words came out.
Emmanuel brought his foot down hard to the ground, and to his surprise,
June did the same. Emmanuel looked at the young man, his eyes seemed com-
pletely white, and his face resembled that of a confident and wise man.
June begun to laugh, though his voice was deeper, the laughter was deep, and
light hearted. June began to shift his legs, moving as though to a dance. Emman-
uel recognized the dance his young friend was performing, which was one that
honored the Orisha. Emmanuel placed the coconut by the other, and emptied
the white powder from his clear bag at the top of the symbol. He took his cigar
and placed it to the white powder when it ignited, and quickly burned away,
flooding the basement with a smoke.
June fell to one knee as the white smoke cleared, and he looked up, his body
shaking.
26 The Palo Muerto

“What was that?” he asked. “I could feel myself moving, but couldn’t control
myself”
“Your spirits were using you to dance.” Emmanuel answered, a smile on his
face. “They are happy that everything was removed from you, because they have
been trying to reach you for a long time. They were dancing because they are
happy that you are ready to receive them.”
“That was crazy.” June said, a smile on his face. “It felt good, just a little scary.
My grand mom used to tell me about that.”
“Your spirits are very powerful.” Emmanuel said. “If you learn to build a rela-
tionship, and honor them, they will take you far.”
June rose to his feet, and looked down at the circle. “Do I have to stay stand-
ing here?”
“No, you can step out of it.” Emmanuel answered. “You are standing on your
own now. No evil spirits with you, no negative energies, you are as you should
be.”
After several hours of talking about the Orisha, Emmanuel and June had
erased all evidence of the cleansing which was performed. All that remained of it
was a white bag, wherein was placed the two coconuts that were used during the
ceremony. The two of them stood on Emmanuel’s porch, the door locked behind
them, both ready to begin their day.
“I’m going to my shop.” Emmanuel said, as they walked down the front steps.
“If you want to come along and experience this religion with your own eyes a lit-
tle farther, you’re more then welcomed to come.”
“Your shop?” June asked.
“Yeah.” Emmanuel answered. “I do work. My house doesn’t pay for itself. I
have a Botanica not far from here. It’s a place where I sell spiritual herbs, figures,
tools, all things relevant to Santeria.”
“I’m not doing anything today.” June answered. “I’ll go.”
Emmanuel smiled at him, and the two went to his car and got in. The drive
wasn’t long, only a few minutes. They parked just in front of a small building in
the center of a street, a banner entitled “Eleggua” was posted right in front.
Emmanuel opened the gates that shielded the windows, and opened the front
door.
They walked into the shop, Emmanuel tossed his keys on the counter next to
the cash register, and walked to the back of the store. He turned on the lights,
revealing the many statues that lined the walls. Foreign instruments were laid out
in a glass displayed case, covered in assorted beads. Metal urns, canes, herbs,
 Daniel Vega 27

incense, crucifixes, glasses, and many other artifacts were on display. Each had an
odd connection to this religion, this Santeria.
Emmanuel walked over to a radio behind the counter and turn it on, music
composed entirely of drums, maracas, and guitars came from the speakers. It was
lively music, though not understood in this foreign language. It was easy to tell
that it was music honoring the Orisha.
Emmanuel pulled out some candy from behind the register and placed them
on a plate in front of the stone figure of Eleggua. He pulled a cigar from his
pocket, and after lighting it, begun to blow smoke onto the figure. He walked
around the Botanica, honoring certain statues that had been decorated differently
from those he had for sale.
“How do you make money here?” June asked. “I don’t think that there are
that many people out there that practice this religion. I mean, you just sell this
shit?”
“Mind your manners.” Emmanuel said, looking over his shoulder at June.
“This isn’t shit. Everything in here, if prepared right, is to honor the Orisha.
Other things in here are used to heal, or to protect yourself from spirits. As far as
money goes, I do pretty well for myself here. There are many Santeros and
Santeras out here in Philadelphia. It’s just that not everyone is as ready to reveal
their belief as I am.”
A bell came from the door. A woman who had pushed it opened had hit the
bell that hung from the ceiling, a normal instrument to alert Emmanuel that
someone had entered. She walked around the store, pulling candles from the
shelf, each of the candles had an image on it. It didn’t take long before she had
placed six candles on the counter and had selected several strands of beads for
purchase.
Emmanuel stepped behind the counter, and totaled up the woman’s purchase.
She laid the money on the register, and Emmanuel picked it up, made change,
and placed it upon the counter. As the woman reached for it, Emmanuel placed
his hand on hers.
“I know he is hurting you.” Emmanuel said, looking into the woman’s eyes.
She looked back at him. The look on her face showed her sorrow. “You are doing
everything that you should do as a mother, and it isn’t your fault. What he is
doing he chose to do, and learned away from you. Just be patient, and if you need
help, I am here.”
“He doesn’t listen to me anymore.” The woman said, her lips quivered as she
fought against her pain. “I had a dream that my son was shot. I know he is doing
28 The Palo Muerto

things on the street and I don’t want to have to bury him. He’s so young. I don’t
know what to do.”
“You know exactly what to do, mi Amor.” Emmanuel said, a smile stretched
across his face. “You turn to your Orisha. You ask them to save your son and keep
him safe. You ask them to look in your heart and bring you some peace. You have
done everything that you can do, but now you have to understand that its time a
higher power helps you to reach your goal.”
Emmanuel stepped out from behind the counter and picked up a statue of a
boy sitting on a throne. He held a staff in one hand, and in the other a basket. He
had long flowing hair, with a red and black robe on. He placed it in a bag, and
handed it to the woman.
“A gift from me to your son.” He said, as she grabbed the bag. “Teach him
who this is, and how to honor him. After your prayers are heard tonight, he will
turn around.”
She placed the bags on the floor, and crossed her hands across her chest, bow-
ing low to the ground. “Alafia.” She said.
“Alafia.” Emmanuel answered back.
She picked her bags up and walked out the store, a smile upon her face. June
looked over to Emmanuel, then back to the woman as she passed by the window.
“How did you know what she needed that for?”
“I thought I answered that question for you.” Emmanuel said. “The Orisha
speaks to me. They speak to all of us, if you would just listen, you would hear
them.”
“But why would they tell you her problems?”
“She needed some encouragement.” Emmanuel answered. “When you see
someone, you love destroying their self, you tend to lose faith in what you
believe. She needed to hear that what she was doing was the right thing to do.”
“I just don’t understand why I couldn’t do anything for my friend, yo.” June
said, walking across the room and picking up one of the maracas with red and
white beads around it. “I mean, he was a good guy, we did some shit out on the
streets, but we ain’t ever hurt anybody. Not enough for him to be killed like
this.”
“I’m sorry about your friend.” Emmanuel said. “But what you have to do is
carry him with you now. You have to keep him alive, and understand he isn’t
gone. He’s simply in another form. In time, June, I promise you will be able to
see him again.
“It’s funny how things turn out. Take Jacob, my long time friend. He and I
did battle against some of the most evil spirits this world has ever seen. He was
 Daniel Vega 29

always righteous, always just. He saved me when I was a child, brought me to the
path I’m on now. In the end, he was killed by a spirit.
“When things like this happen, we always find ourselves thinking, what would
have happened if I was there; or, maybe it would have been different had I did
this or that. The truth of the matter is, we all walk this road alone.”
June nodded though he kept his head level with the floor, as though Emman-
uel’s words had been a personal reflection to his feelings and experiences.
“Sure we have our friends, and our families, but all of our fates are ours to
learn.” Continued Emmanuel. “No one can bring about my lessons in life faster.
It is for me to find the answers myself. What I take comfort in is that I have my
Orisha with me, and they will always be there for me.
“I know in Jacobs last moments he understood what was happening. I know
that he accepted his fate, and has found peace. Jacob will forever live inside of me,
inside everyone he ever touched in this life.”
“How was he killed by a spirit?” June asked a few moments later. “I mean, I
was always told that a spirit can’t touch anything physically.”
“June, there are things in this world that you have never seen, and you never
would wanna see.” Emmanuel answered. “Spirits have power, but it’s not in their
nature to harm you. When you have someone that knows what I know, they can
provoke a spirit to bring about horrors to a person’s life. They are pulled from
their path, feed to gain power, and then shown what they could never have again,
life. So they go and attack the one they were sent out to get.
“Now, they can’t walk over and slap you, but they can do far worse. They can
speak to you, whisper in your ear. Their words go straight into your head, almost
as though they are your own thoughts. In time it will make you believe that you
are everything they tell you that you are. Worthless, without hope, hated, ugly,
stupid, they will break you. Now what you have to understand is that, what I just
described is a spirit that is sent to hurt you, but is only a weak spirit.”
“Well what do you do when something like that happens?” June asked. “How
can you tell when it’s a spirit or just your own thoughts?”
“Well that’s way Santeros are here.” Emmanuel outstretched his arms with a
smile spread out across his face. “I’ll teach you how to defend yourself.
“Now a stronger spirit can manifest itself on the physical plane. They can
touch you, touch things around you, show you horrors, but in the end they want
to possess you. Live inside of you. Spirits with that power are hardly seen, though
I have encountered more in this lifetime then I care to admit.”
“Show you horrors?” June asked. “What kinds of things do they be showing
you?”
30 The Palo Muerto

“Whatever they know you fear.” Emmanuel answered. “They can’t read your
mind, but they can watch you. They can observe you and if you don’t guard your
mind, you will send them your thoughts. The one thing I know that they always
do is, manifest so you can see them, and they wait. When you are alone, they
show themselves to you, looking straight in your eyes. Now you don’t think that
this can scare you but what you don’t understand is that, there is power in them.
You see their eyes, and you freeze in pure terror. You try and move, but you can’t,
try to speak, but nothing comes out your mouth, you are simply frozen.
“Then they come to you, slowly, their movements are not like ours. They
don’t have a body so, they seem to distort their movements, almost like they
move with the simplest of motions but at a great speed. If you have a strong
mind, they will vanish and wait until you are weaker, but if you are not strong,
they will begin their possession.
“They enter your body, and share it with you. You are always in control, but
now they are hearing your thoughts, they are fighting to control you, they begin
breaking you down. Oh, you love your mother, well now they will make you hate
her, show you ideas of murdering her. They will do everything to you to make
you doubt your every action, break down your mind, then you are completely
taken.”
“That’s some crazy shit.” June said. “Did that shit ever happen to you?”
“No.” Emmanuel answered. “My gift allows me to always see them and always
hear them. I know my own thoughts from their voice because it would be as
though you are standing next to me trying to convince me of something. My
spiritual strength has grown to the level where they normally can’t get within a
few feet of me. In time, I hope to build you to that level.”
“I don’t understand.” June said, a puzzled look upon his face. “How did they
get Jacob then, I mean, you said that he brought you to your path right? He
fought battles against them and all. So how could one get him in the end?”
“That spirit wasn’t anything he could have faced alone.” Emmanuel admitted.
The image of the disemboweled woman flashed in his head, her stench of death
came to his nose. “She was strong, and well feed. We fought her and another one,
just two nights ago. During that battle, she attacked Jacob, but his Elekes took
the hit, they shattered from his neck. I had no idea that she was prepared to do
just that, and she escaped that battle inside of Jacob, somewhere she knew I
wouldn’t look for her.
“When Jacob was alone, and at his weakest, she manifested herself. She
showed him horrible things. She planted seeds of doubt in his mind. She froze
him in his place and when he thought he would die, believing he was having a
 Daniel Vega 31

heart attack, she inspired that belief so strongly in his mind, that in the end, he
stopped his own heart.”
“What the fuck yo.” June said. “How the fuck can someone do that yo, that’s
some freaky ass shit, I don’t care what you say.”
“Someone with a strong understanding in the Ekon can do this.” Emmanuel
answered. “I mean, aside from myself, I don’t know anyone that can do this. One
thing I do know though, is that this person hasn’t finished yet.”
“Padrino!” The bells rung at the door as a young man walked in. He was
dressed in all white, carrying a wooden cane. He was short, standing at 5'5", with
a tan complexion, his curly hair showing from beneath his white hat. He had a
visible tattoo on his neck, a grenade, and a tribal band running down his arms.
“Bendicion.” He said, embracing Emmanuel, then pounding his arms, crossed
against his chest.
“Luis. Ache.” Emmanuel greeted the young man.
Luis was Emmanuel’s first godson to pass the initiation and become a Santero.
He was young, 21-years-old, and the most concerning of all his godsons.
“I came over the second I heard what happened.” Luis said. “How are you
doing?”
“I’m fine, Luis.” Emmanuel said, then held out his arm to June. “This is your
newest God Brother, June.” He introduced the two.
Luis turned and seen June for the first time, then embraced June, and crossed
his arms, pounding them against his chest. “Alafia.” Luis greeted him.
June attempted to mimic was he had seen him do, and repeated the word, Ala-
fia. Luis turned with a smile and looked at Emmanuel. “He’s new to this uh.”
June cast a cold stare at Luis, and turned away.
“No disrespect, June.” Luis said. “I remember what it’s like to come to this
religion. Emmanuel found me five years ago, messing around with them streets
and helped me out. I swear to you, if it wasn’t for this man, I would have been
dead a long time ago. Now you are my brother, and I know I don’t know any-
thing about you, but know that I will ride for you, because you are my brother.”
“That’s wussup, man.” June said, turning around and shaking Luis’s hand.
Luis held June’s hand briefly, his brows slightly arched as though he was
straining to hear something.
“I’m sorry to hear about your friend.” Luis said. “We all lose people along the
way, but we have to keep going for them.”
A quick flash of confusion swept across June’s face, then he looked to Emman-
uel.
“You got the same gift as Emmanuel?” June asked.
32 The Palo Muerto

Luis laughed. “I wish. No one I know has the gift like he does, but if you listen
to him, and you build a relationship with the Orisha, then they will find a way to
speak to you.”
“Unfortunately, June, not all my god children came to me as easily as you
did.” Emmanuel said, with a smirk on his face, looking at Luis. “Some of them
had to lose people, even though they were warned. Got locked up, even when
they were told it would happen. Get kicked out of their houses, even though they
were told it would happen. Some of them took nearly four years to turn around
and realize that they should have just listened from the beginning like you did.”
“Yeah, yeah.” Luis said. “Well I had to learn for myself.”
“You did.” Emmanuel said. “You did well for yourself in the end.”
A man walked into the Botanica, the bells drew their attention to the door,
but the man paid them no mind, and begun browsing through the shop, selecting
various items. Luis walked behind the counter and started watching the man,
Emmanuel walked over to the window and looked out at people walking by. June
stood next to him, Emmanuel lowered his head and shook it, unhappy with the
things around him
“It just amazes me, how everyone walks around this world in complete igno-
rance.” Emmanuel said. “Tell me what you see out there, through this window
on the streets?”
June looked out, noting the young man selling drugs on the corner, and the
various people sitting on their steps in conversations. Even the dog that run up
and down the street with children. “Nothing. Just a normal neighborhood.”
Emmanuel looked out the window, seeing tall dark shadow behind the young
man on the corner. It was evil, smoke seemed to raise from its presence, its eyes
glowed with an evil red tint. A small child stood in the street, looking back at
Emmanuel through the window, an old, dirty teddy bear in his hand. Cars drove
through the child as though he was not even there, the child never moved, simply
started at Emmanuel, a deathly wound down the front of his forehead showed
how he had died. The poor child seemed only five years old.
He looked at many other unseen things that walked through the neighbor-
hood, some evil, some good, some lost. He turned away from the window. Luis
received payment for a purchase that the man had just completed before exiting
the Botanica.
“I wanna see that for myself.” June said, still looking out the window. “I
mean, it’s funny that my main man died yesterday, and this is actually bringing
me a little comfort and all, but I need to understand better. I mean, there’s a lot
of other people in my life that I care about. Shit, I wanna be able to go to sleep
 Daniel Vega 33

knowing that I really am doing everything I can by them, dig me?” June turned
away from the window, Luis walked from behind the counter.
“Padrino, Bendicion.” He said, crossing his arms and pounding his chest with
them. “I have some work to do. You going to be okay?”
“Yes, there is no need to worry about me.” Emmanuel said. “Go do what you
have to do, call me later tonight, I may have something you can do for me.”
“All right, I’ll call you.” Luis faced June and saluted him as he did his God
Father. “Alafia.”
June repeated the salute, and watched as Luis walked out the Botanica. He got
inside of a red Ford, and drove off.
Emmanuel took a step back from the window as his gift of sight revealed the
sky grow dark. His mouth opened in shock at this great display of power, of such
vast evil. It seemed as though the sun itself couldn’t penetrate the dark that
stretched out across the area. Everyone outside continued about their business,
unaware of the unseen power, some presences, that Emmanuel was sure would
reveal itself.
“Damn, did it just get cold as hell or something.” June said, rubbing his hands
over his arms. “Got chills.”
“Get away from the window.” Emmanuel said, his expressions completely
sober. He looked out the window, and seen a man on the other side of the street
looking at him through the window.
The man had stood just a few feet from the drug dealer that had been on the
corner. He was dressed in blue jeans, with a light blue button up shirt, timber-
land boots on his feet. He was wearing a black baseball cap, and holding a cane in
his hand. Emmanuel recognized the cane to be a Palo Muerto. He had a dark
complexion, black man, about 5'6", still fairly young looking. If Emmanuel had
to guess, he was in his early twenties, with a light moustache and beard.
He walked across the street, Emmanuel walked around the counter and picked
up his Palo Muerto. He held it in his arm, looking to the door as the bells chimed
when the man had entered the bontanica. Emmanuel’s eyes remained on him,
watching every move he made, knowing that even though the man was not look-
ing at him, he was doing the same.
The man stopped and begun to pick up a few candles, putting them back after
reading the inscriptions on each one, Emmanuel saw a dark shadow of a spirit
gather at the man’s side and vanish.
“So these protect people, I assume?” the man asked, still not facing Emman-
uel. The chimes went off at the door, and Luis walked back in, looking at his
God Father then at the man. A slight nodded exchanged between the two, and
34 The Palo Muerto

Luis stood by the counter. “You know, where I come from, we don’t need these
candles with inscriptions on them. It’s almost as though everyone needs some-
thing to guide their faith out here in America.”
“Maybe they miss you where you’re from.” Luis snapped at the man, watching
as he turned to look him up and down. “Out here in America, we show respect
when you in another man’s house.”
The man turned around, without looking extended his hand to place a statue
of Eleggua back on the shelf, but missed and allowed it to fall on the floor and
break.
“I’m sorry.” The man said, walking toward the counter. “I can be clumsy
sometimes, allow me to pay for it.” He fumbled in his pocket and pulled out a
large bundle of cash.
“Why don’t you just leave?” Luis asked, June walked from behind the counter
and crossed his arms at his chest. Emmanuel noticed the stance that June stood in
was one that you would take to fight.
“June, Luis, it’s okay.” Emmanuel said. “He is a guest in my house, relax.”
“Yeah, Luis.” The man said with a smile on his face. “Listen to your Padrino.
He’s a smart man.”
“Now what do you want.” Emmanuel snapped at the man. “You came here
for something, and I know it wasn’t conversation.”
Emmanuel’s hair stood on his arm as three spirits appeared behind the man,
and two he recognized immediately. The woman, and the misshaped man he had
cleansed from the house with Jacob seemed to mock him as they stood in their
place. He looked straight at them, then glared into the man’s eyes with pure
hatred.
“Maybe I did come for a bit of a conversation, Emmanuel.” The man said
with a smile, aware that Emmanuel had seen his Muertos. “Someone has been
wanting to see you for a long time. An old friend of yours, but right now, he isn’t
ready to talk to you.”
Emmanuel’s eyes followed the woman as she walked over toward June, and he
brought his Palo Muerto down to the floor sharply, and out stretched his hand to
her.
“Back Creature!” he shouted, the man’s face went pale as all three spirits
shouted and vanished in fear. Emmanuel felt a cool breeze on his neck, and heard
a gentle whisper in his ear.
The man’s eyes shifted back and forth at the image of a small child, and a
woman with a gold gown that stood behind Emmanuel. The cloud of darkness
seemed to vanish, and a smile stretched across Emmanuel’s face.
 Daniel Vega 35

“You don’t know who you’re up against, little man.” Emmanuel said, noticing
the man backing up into the shelf in fear. “You have power, I will not lie to you,
and yes I have felt it. The power I have is nothing you have ever experience, and
far greater then the evil spirits that follow you. Your friend that knows me, I
don’t care to know, if he wants to see me so badly, he needs only to walk through
my door.”
June’s eyes opened wide, looking back and forth from the man and Emman-
uel. He was aware that there were some things that were unseen in the room, but
the confidence the man carried when he had walked through the door had com-
pletely vanished. He noticed that Luis stood in his place, completely in control,
watching the strange man with complete disgust.
The man cleared his throat, and focused back on Emmanuel, leaning on his
staff for support.
“You are strong, but you don’t know what my Godfather is capable of doing.”
The man’s confidence returned to him, and he walked back to the counter. “You
know, this is a strange world we live in. All the rapes, murders, kidnaping. What
kind of world do we live in where an old man can’t even enjoy a TV dinner
before bed?” The man laughed out loud, Luis and June looked to Emmanuel.
“I agree completely.” Said Emmanuel. “But you know what helps me to sleep
at night? Knowing that no matter how hard wicked men, just like you and your
Padrino, try to bring chaos into peoples lives, there are people like me that can
undo their efforts. And make no mistakes, people like me, no matter how well we
try to be, will fight back to the death if we have to. You wicked people stand no
chance in this world, you are weak people that couldn’t make it, so you try to
twist things to make yourselves sleep better at night.
“You insult all of my kind with the corruption you brought to this religion.
You will get what you deserve, in fact, I will make sure of it!”
The man counted out money, and crumbled a few twenties together, drop-
ping it on the counter in front of Emmanuel. “For the statue.” He said, turning
to the door. Emmanuel picked up the money, and laughed.
“Take your money.” He said, throwing it and hitting the man’s back with it.
“Maybe in can comfort you tonight as you lay in your bed. I’m more then confi-
dent you’re going to need all the comfort you can get in your last days.”
The man opened the door and walked out, leaving the money behind him.
Luis looked at Emmanuel and shook his head.
“What the hell was that all about?” Luis asked. “I felt him all the way down
the street.”
36 The Palo Muerto

Emmanuel closed his eyes and focused on the man as he walked away, a flash
came in his mind, as images appeared like a movie played in his head. He could
see the strange man, running into his house after his mother as a young boy, no
older then four-years-old. The back of the house was on fire. His father laid
unconscious on the kitchen floor. It was clear to Emmanuel that this man was in
Africa
The flashes continued, Emmanuel could now see the man as a child, a few
years later. They appeared to be at a tribal ceremony. He sat in the center of a cir-
cle with a blind fold around his eyes. Several men, Emmanuel could clearly iden-
tify as Priests, were initiating him to the priest hood. He could see a great
spiritual energy in the man as a child, but also a lot of anger and hate. There were
some presences there, though Emmanuel couldn’t see the person.
The flash moved the image to the stranger, this time older, obviously he had
completed his trails, standing as a full-fledged priest. He was dressed in red and
white garments, the same cane in his hand that he carried now. Younger then he
is now, but his mind was not entirely corrupted in the Ekon. He walked in
Africa, the place he had always been, this time a new stranger stood before him.
An American, it seemed, though his image could not be captured in the vision.
Now he could see the man with this American he met in Africa, just outside of
the house that Emmanuel could remember cleaning. The American stood behind
the stranger, placing his hands on his shoulders, the African slammed his Palo
Muerto against the ground repeatedly. Emmanuel could see the two evil spirits
rise, and the priest chanted his prayer, giving his spirits power to manifest them-
selves. He pointed his cane at the house, and just like that, they charge at it, van-
ishing inside of it. The lights within the house begun to flash, and from inside
you could hear a woman scream.
The African looked to the American. Emmanuel still could not see the Ameri-
cans’ face.
“It’s already begun, Padrino.” The African said. “They were fed before this
ceremony. They’ll take care of them for you.”
“Good, Joseph.” The American said. “But trust me when I tell you, Emman-
uel is watching us, even as we speak.” The American raised a Palo Muerto of his
own, Emmanuel could feel great power from the American as he brought his cane
to the ground, the vision ended.
“Eleggua!” Emmanuel whispered with great intensity, Luis and June looked at
each other, as Emmanuel leaned over, grabbing the beads around his neck.
“Padrino!” Luis leaned forward and grabbed Emmanuel’s arm, attempting to
keep him from falling. “What happened?”
 Daniel Vega 37

“His name is Joseph.” Emmanuel said. “He has great power, but nothing I
can’t handle.” Emmanuel turned and leaned on the counter, regaining his
strength. “He was born and raised in African, was crowned there, and has great
power. Somewhere down his path, he met an American, who has brought him
here, who has greater power then him. I don’t know who this American is, but
it’s clear that he knew Jacob, and he knows me. He made Joseph send his spirits
in the house we cleansed, and he did it with the greatest of ease.”
“Why didn’t we just take care of him, Padrino?” Luis asked, pointing in the
direction of Joseph.
“We’re not murders.” Emmanuel said, casting a mean look at Luis. “We are
not above the laws of God, no matter what we do in our lives. This is going to be
a war, but not one with guns and knives. The enemy has shown himself, and he
struck first. Now it’s time that we strike back!”
 3

Drizzle settled in the grass within Green Mount Cemetery. Many tomb stones
lined the trails through it, though today it was that of Jacobs, that assembled
everyone together on this day.
Emmanuel stood at the head of a grave, a casket sat on poles atop the empty
hole, for Emmanuel’s closest friend Jacob. Santeros lined the site, all their heads
covered, their white garments reflecting the sunlight about them.
“Friends, today we gather to honor a dear and close friend of ours.” Emman-
uel said, all the eyes of the Santeros fell upon him. June stood next to Luis, both
at the side of Emmanuel. “Jacob was a special part of all our lives, weather a
friend, cousin, brother, or son. In his life, Jacob managed to touch the hearts and
lives of everyone here today.
“For me, I was a boy that he helped to become a complete man. Had it not
been for this man, I would be another lost soul, just like the ones we dedicated
our lives on saving. In my many years with him, I know that he was not only held
sacred in our hearts, but in the hearts of the Orisha. So today friends, we will
honor him not as a man that we will dearly miss. We will honor him, as the saint
he was in his life. As the spirit he has become, and knowing full well, that he will
be watching over us, until that day we cross over and embrace him again.
“So right now, right here, lets say good bye to the shell of a man. Today, we
will celebrate the birth of a Saint!”
A man walked over and turned on a switch to the elevator that the casket
rested upon, and it begun to lower into the ground. Tears fell from the eyes of
those standing around, watching and knowing that this would be the last time

- 38 -
 Daniel Vega 39

Jacob will ever be in the physical world. Emmanuel fought with the lump in his
throat, looking down at the white casket, he could recall the first time he met
Jacob.
Emmanuel closed his eyes, allowing the memories to return to him. He hoped
for comfort, but instead, found the pain of his lose was nearly unbearable.

21 years ago
The church of St. Boniface is located in North Philadelphia, just west of the
Kensington community. Directly across the street of Norris Square Park, which
is nothing more then a few trees growing around a small playground, built on a
small square of grass. Walking through this park would reveal that it was also a
home for winos and the homeless, with empty 40oz beer bottles, and empty crack
viles, scattered on the ground like decorations.
Despite the park, the church was fairly descent. From the outside it appeared
small, but walking in revealed a wonderful religious world. High ceilings and
beautiful Catholic figures lining the walls. The entire crucifixion told through a
series of statues, embedded in the walls. Looking from left to right in a circle
would walk you through the entire history.
To follow the center isle, lined by the many benches would lead you to the
front of the church, where a grand stage stood. A large house shaped marble
statue, depicting angels, the crucifix, and Jesus Christ himself was erected here,
just in front of it stood the table used by the priest during their mass. As with
most churches, standing within this building had the power of immediately hum-
bling anyone.
Sunday services had just ended, and the entire congregation was leaving the
church. Everyone dressed in their best clothes, flooding out the church doors.
Only two people seemed to move against the crowd. A woman dressed in her
brown dress, a hat with a veil concealing her face. She held Emmanuel’s arm
tightly, pulling him with her pace as she approached a priest.
“Excuse me, father.” She said, stopping and watching as he turned away from
gathering his belongings. “I was hoping I could have a moment of your time.”
The priest turn, looking through the veil, he could see the woman’s blood shot
eyes. It was apparent that she had been crying and hadn’t come across much
sleep. He looked down at the child she had by the hand at her side.
“How can I help you?” the priest asks, genuine concern was held in his voice.
“I need help, father.” She said, breaking down, almost as though she held her-
self together until this exact moment. “I think I’m going out of my mind. There
are things happening that I need answers too.”
40 The Palo Muerto

“Oh, don’t cry.” The priest said, he put a hand on her shoulder, directing her
to the benches and sitting down next to her. “What is it that distresses you so?”
“Emmanuel, go and light a candle, sweetie.” She said, releasing her sons hand.
Emmanuel looked at her and the priest, then slowly turned away. He could
hear them speak as he walked slowly to the altar.
“My husband was deathly ill.” She explained. “The doctors couldn’t find any
explanation for his condition, but I prayed and prayed, Father. The other night,
my son was in the room, and I could see something was on his mind. It was as
though he was listening to someone, like something was guiding him.
“He walked over to his father and put his hand on my husband’s head and
begun chanting, it was nothing I could understand. The room went cold. I felt
something evil there. But Emmanuel, he just kept chanting, and started dancing,
then the windows in my room shatter and his father completely recovered.
“I need to know what is happening to my son, Father. He sees people that
aren’t there, he tells people things and they happen. Is my son possessed? Is this
an act of God? What is happening to him, Father? I’m a mother and I know I
should be able to help my son through anything, but how can I help him through
something I know nothing about.”
“She’s over there, talking about me.” Emmanuel said, lighting a candle in a
glass tub. “I think she hates me now.”
“No, she doesn’t hate you.” Eleggua said, standing next to Emmanuel. “She’s
confused right now, but I made sure that today, all that confusion will go away.”
“What do you mean?” Emmanuel asked, turning his head to his invisible
friend. He caught a glance of the priest, whose eyes had been on him from the
bench.
“Today you are going to meet Jacob.” Eleggua said, turning and pointing to
the back of the benches, where a man sat silently. “He knows who I am, and he is
going to help you and your family to understand who I am.”
Emmanuel stood up, and turned to face the man sitting silently, watching him
“How does he know me?” Emmanuel asked.
“I gave him a dream.” Eleggua answered. “I showed him this place, and so he
came.”
“You can do that?” Emmanuel asked, his face took on an expression of won-
der. “How come you don’t play with me in my dreams?”
“Because you can see me, Emmanuel.” Eleggua said, laughing, and watching
as Emmanuel laughed with him.
Emmanuel saw that his mother stood up with the priest, and both begun to
walk over in his direction.
 Daniel Vega 41

“Here they go.” Eleggua said. “You talk to your mommy, I’m going to go
bring Jacob over here.”
Emmanuel watched his friend run through the benches, in a playful way, stop-
ping next to the man. He turned his attention back to his mother and the priest
as they stopped in front of him.
“Hello young fellow,” the priest greeted him, bending to be level with
Emmanuel. “I was just talking to your mother, and she has told me some amaz-
ing things about you.”
“What did she tell you?” Emmanuel asked, curious as a child.
“Oh, she told me a lot about you.” The priest said. “But what I find interest-
ing is what you did to your father when he was sick. Tell me Emmanuel, how did
you make him better?”
“It wasn’t just me.” Emmanuel said, looking at Eleggua standing behind the
man. He had placed his hands on the man’s shoulders and whispered into his
ears, when his head turned and looked directly at him. “My friend and I chased
away the bad spirit.”
“Spirit?” the priest asked. “Can you see spirits, Emmanuel?”
“Yes.” Emmanuel answered. “Can’t you?”
“Oh, no Emmanuel.” The priest answered. “What do these spirits look like?”
“Oh, I don’t know.” Emmanuel answered. “They all look different.”
“Well then, tell me about the one that you chased out with your friend.” The
priest said. “What did he look like?”
“He was scary.” Emmanuel answered, watching as the man stood from his seat
and begun to make his way over to them. “He was very bad, so my friend taught
me how to get rid of him.”
“What does your friend look like?” the priest asked. “Is he scary?”
“No.” Emmanuel answered, watching the man stop just a few feet behind
them. “He looks like a little boy, like me.”
“Is he here now?” the priest asks.
“Hey, let’s have some fun with this old fart.” Eleggua said laughing as he stood
nearly face to face with the priest, who couldn’t see him. “I want you to repeat
everything I say.”
“Yes, he is standing right next to you.” Emmanuel said, watching as his
mother and the priest’s face distorted in both shock and surprise. Though the
answer was clear, he spoke in perfect Latin. “He’s tired of you old farts thinking
that he is the devil. He’s tired of you looking down at my kind, and when you
realize the truth in your life, you will realize you are a fool. Unfortunately, by
then, it will be too late.”
42 The Palo Muerto

“Excuse me.” The man standing behind Emmanuel’s mother and the priest
had said. “I’m sorry to interrupt you, but would you mind if I speak to the
child?”
Emmanuel’s mother turned, then walked behind her son, holding him close
to her.
“I’m sorry, who are you?” his mother asked, the priest stood up, still a little
startled from the child’s comment. “I may have the answers that you are looking
for.”
“About my son?” She asked.
“Yes.” The man said. “Allow me to introduce myself. My name is…”
“Jacob.” Emmanuel said, smiling up at the man. “I like him, Mommy. Eleg-
gua told me he would bring you answers.”
“He told me to come here.” The man said, kneeing down in front of Emman-
uel. His mother looked a bit startled, but had a slight sense of comfort that some-
one had some answers. The priest stood silently, completely baffled. “He showed
you to me, in a dream. He said that you had a very special gift, and said that you
are a very special little man.”
“Jacob is so silly, sometimes.” Eleggua laughed. Emmanuel laughed with him,
looking in his direction, everyone else looked but seen nothing there.
“You’re talking to him right now, aren’t you?” Jacob asked.
“Tell him I’m hungry.” Eleggua said, laughing as he did. “Tell him I want
some candy, and to stop hitting me with the door.”
“What does that mean?” Emmanuel asked, everyone looking at him oddly.
“Just tell him.” Eleggua said, in a childish way.
“He said that he’s hungry, and to stop hitting him with the door.” Emmanuel
repeated.
Jacob smiled down at the little boy, and then up at his mother. “I’m sorry,
ma’am, I don’t think that you are going to get any help here, but I’m sure that I
can help you.”
“What is it?” she asked. “How can you be sure you can help?”
“Your son doesn’t need any help ma’am.” The man said. “He needs to be edu-
cated, understand exactly what he has, and how to use it.”
“What is it?” she asked. “What does he have?”
“A very beautiful and special gift.” Jacob answered. “Many people would love
to be in your sons position, some even die trying to have it. Your son, well
ma’am, your son in one in a million.”
 Daniel Vega 43

Emmanuel walked over to his car, and after sitting inside of it, he looked over
his shoulder to Jacobs grave. He fought the frog in his throat. He thought of all
of the many battles they entered together. Now he would walk in them battles
physically alone. He put his head on the stirring wheel, and for a moment wept.
He couldn’t help thinking that the only one, who truly understood him, had
departed from the living.
He felt the hairs on the back of his neck stand on end. A gentle whisper came
to his ear. He turned to see the woman in the gold dress, Oshun, sitting next to
him with a smile. He looked to his right and seen Luis and June approaching.
Along the side of them walked a beautiful young woman. A smile stretched across
his face, almost instantly.
He stepped out his car, and brought his hands against his chest. “Alafia.”
She did the same, then embraced him warmly.
“Oh, Emmanuel.” The words choked in her throat, her face wet with tears.
“This wasn’t nature! This was evoked. Someone did this to him.”
“I know.” Emmanuel said, holding himself together in her embrace. “Now
isn’t the time to worry about that. Just focus on all the good times we had, and
tonight we will honor him.”
Luis opened Emmanuel’s car door and sat in the driver’s side, June jumped in
the back. Emmanuel looked over at Luis, who had already started the car.
“You’re in no condition to be driving.” Luis said. “I’ll drive, just get in, I know
where we’re going.”
“Are you all right?” Emmanuel asked the woman.
“I’ll be okay.” She answered. “I’ll meet you at your Botanica in a little while.”
Emmanuel sat in the car, June followed the woman with his eyes as she walked
away, from the back window.
“Damn, who is that?” June asked.
The woman stopped and looked back at the car as though she had heard
June’s remark.
“Careful.” Emmanuel said, looking through the rear view mirror. “That’s my
god sister Elisha, a very powerful Santera. We traveled to Africa when we were
young. She was crowned there with me.”
“Damn.” June said, shaking his head and turning it away. “She’s mighty fine
though.”
They pulled off, driving through the cemetery, Emmanuel staring back at
spirits that stood about. Some were normal, but others were grotesque, and all
aware of his presence. They came to the exit. A long stone wall with a green gate.
Luis stopped just at it. Emmanuel opened the window and throw nine pennies to
44 The Palo Muerto

the ground, closing his eyes and honoring, Oya, the deity of the cemetery. He
lifted his head and looked to the gate, an image of a woman in a dress with seven
different colors faded away at the gate. His eyes widened slightly as he saw the
image of his friend, Jacob, fade away with her.
The three of them parked the car in front of the Botanica, jumping out and
approaching the door. Emmanuel opened the gates, and they entered, Emmanuel
quickly disappearing in the back of the shop. After several minutes, he emerged
from the back, his clothes though still white, was different. The beads on his
neck, and a bracelet on his wrist consisting of red and black bead.
Luis went to the back of the shop as Emmanuel stepped behind the counter,
though opened, he didn’t expect to do business. June stood at the window, look-
ing out into the street.
“How are you holding up?” Emmanuel asked, June looked over his shoulder,
then approached the counter.
“I don’t know.” He answered. “I mean, I’m bad, but it’s like I feel peaceful. I
can’t explain it. Chris was my right-hand man, but I feel like there’s a purpose for
all this I ain’t seen yet.”
“Spoken with true wisdom.” Emmanuel said, nodding his head. “The Orisha
are giving you peace. There is always a plan in the works, and just because we
don’t know exactly what it is, we have to have faith. In time though, you’ll be
talking to your friend and seeing him, as surely as you see me.”
“I don’t know about all that.” June said. “I mean, I know it’s something you
been doing for years, but I don’t think that it’s something that’s in me.”
“It is.” Emmanuel said. “All of this is in your blood. You haven’t been able to
reach down deep within yourself to see it, but it’s there.”
“Padrino, why you ain’t tell me about that sexy ass god sister of yours?” Luis
asked, emerging from the back of the shop, pulling on a dry white shirt. “I mean,
she was hot, I wouldn’t mind making her my wife.”
“You have one though, so shut the hell up.” Emmanuel said, looking at him
with eyes of steel. “She’s my god sister, and endured the same ceremony as I did,
nearly 21 years ago.”
“Damn, you was butt naked with her in your ceremony?” Luis laughed. “I
would have had a hard on.”
“Butt naked?” June asked.
Emmanuel laughed with Luis, then turned to June. “The crowning is a sacred
ceremony where you are introduced to the Orisha, born to them, in a sense. Day
one of the ceremony you are entirely naked, and blindfolded, for hours.”
 Daniel Vega 45

“Oh, hell no.” June said. “I’m not gonna be butt as naked for hours in front of
strange people.”
“Chill out June.” Emmanuel said. “It’s nothing crazy, and during that cere-
mony, the Orisha will be so close to you that you won’t even know the condition
you’re in.”
“Yeah, I know.” Luis said, with a smile spread across his face. “I nearly burned
my ass off with that candle, kneeling there for hours. It was worth it though, I
mean, I was a little nervous at first but it was all worth it.”
June just shook his head, and walked back to the window, looking through it
and watching everyone walk by. Emmanuel pulled out a bottle from under the
counter, a label “Florida Water” on it. He opened it and poured a little bit of the
clear fluid in his hand, the sweet smell of it spread across the room quickly. He
chanted under his breath and spread it over his forehead, neck, and down his
arms.
He handed the bottle to Luis, who did the same thing, then called June over
to the counter, and poured some in his hand. June mimicked what he had seen
the two of them do, and Emmanuel smiled at him.
The sound of the bells forced everyone’s attention to Elisha who had just
walked in. She stepped in, and after approaching Emmanuel, held her hands out,
cupped them together. He poured some of the florida water into her hand, and
she rubbed it as the others did before her.
“It was one long journey for him.” Elisha said, still thinking of the burial. “To
think, he found us so long ago, and brought us to the Orisha.”
“He did.” Emmanuel said, just loud enough for them to hear. “He brought
sanity into my life at that time. I mean, my mother was about to have me exor-
cized!”
Elisha brought her hand to her mouth and giggled, looking up through her
long eye lashes. Her long dark hair curled down over her shoulder, her white
dress accented by her deep tan complexion. She was short, 5'5", the curves of her
body made people quickly forget that she was a Santera.
“How I hated, and blamed him, for all those long trips to Africa.” She said, a
smile on her face still, her eyes drifting off with the memory she held onto in her
head. “Looking back at those times, makes me realize how much I really loved
going there though. I was always mad, and giving him a hard time, you were
always lost in your own thoughts, and David, forget it.”
“Yeah, David was a hand full.” Emmanuel said, shaking his head. “I still
wanna know what he did to that stewardess on the airplane.”
46 The Palo Muerto

“Oh my God.” Elisha said. “She ran into the bathroom, screaming at the top
of her lungs about the devil being on the plane. It took five people to hold her
down and sedate her.”
“Well, it was David after all.” Emmanuel said. “As close to the devil as you can
get.”
The two looked at each other and laughed.
“Who’s David?” Luis interrupted, a little upset he had not been part of the
conversation.
“He’s my God brother.” Emmanuel said. “Well Elisha’s and mines. Jacob
took us to Africa to receive our crowns, but I haven’t heard from him in years.”
“I spoke to him when I heard about Jacob.” Elisha said. “He had just returned
from a trip to Brazil. He broke down on the phone, and said he couldn’t make it,
but would honor him tonight with us.”
“Brazil, uh.” Emmanuel said. “Last I heard from him, he was on another pil-
grimage, said something about his Muerto calling to him.”
“The two of you were always so atone to them.” Elisha said. “I mean, I
learned, I found my way. You and David though, it was way different for the two
of you. You guys seen and heard them from the beginning. I remember during
the crowning, our babalo touched you, and said that he was blessed for having
touched someone who had been touched by God himself.”
“Yeah, I remember.” Emmanuel said. “For having been touched by God
though, has been one hell of a curse.”
“When the hell were you going to introduce me to your brother and sister.”
Luis protested. “I mean, you told me everything else, but left a big part of the pic-
ture out. And how come I don’t have any God sisters!” he looked Elisha up and
down while she had been looking away.
Emmanuel laughed, June was nodding with approval as to Luis’s remark.
“He was right to not speak of us.” Elisha said. “We shouldn’t have been your
focus during your upbringing in this religion. Though, we could have helped you
out, we were also on our own enlightenment.” She looked at the two of them, her
eyes penetrating, as though she was seeing something there. “Do you mean if I
speak to them?”
“No, by all means.” Emmanuel said.
“You have a powerful spirit.” Elisha said, looking at Luis. “I see that you have
developed a wonderful relationship with your Orisha, and for that you have
become strong. Know this, before your pride gets the better of you. You are not
more powerful then the next man. The power given to you is the power of the
 Daniel Vega 47

Orisha, and the wisdom to use it is the key. Betray them and you will not have it
anymore.”
“You.” She said, turning to June. “You have cheated death by the blessing of
the Orisha. You were doomed only a week ago to die an early death. You have
another chance to change and become something great. I feel a fire in you, a great
fire. Passion for life, for happiness. Use that fire to guide you in the direction of
the Orisha. Make your grandmother proud of you, as she too was once in your
place.”
Emmanuel’s mind begun to drift, though his sister’s lips moved, he couldn’t
hear the words coming from them. His attention instead was on a figure that
begun to materialize behind June. It was dark and chilling, the disemboweled
woman drool dripping from her mouth. She out stretched hand was only inches
away from touching June’s shoulder.
“Back Creature!” Emmanuel shouted, stomping his feet against the floor.
The spirit arm recoiled. Luis reached out and took hold of June pulling him
away. Elisha opened her mouth and begun to sing a song in Lucumi, her voice
rising and falling, her prayers heard in the form of a song.
Emmanuel grabbed a coconut from a basket at the counter, and quickly
rubbed Cascarillia over it, the spirit being held by Elisha’s prayer. After the coco-
nut was covered, he dropped it on the floor and kicked it over to the spirit. Out
reaching his hand, he grabbed his Palo Muerto and begun pounding it against the
group, praying in Lucumi.
Eleggua materialized behind the other spirit, along with the tall dark figure of
Chango. The two Orisha outstretched their arms to the spirit and like a vacuum,
the spirit seemed to suck into the coconut. Its voice howled as it seemed to dis-
tort, being pulled into it by the force of the Orisha.
June looked over, seeing only the Coconut, his eyes not disciplined to see the
spirits, but for an instant, had seen the hand of the spirit as it was consumed into
the coconut, and jumped back.
“What the fuck was that?” he asked, looking at Luis who seemed to be the
only one that had not been occupied in prayer.
“That was a Muerto.” Luis answered. “I didn’t see it until Padrino weakened
it. It was about to attack you.”
“It seems you have had your hands full lately.” Elisha said, looking down at
the coconut. “Doesn’t quite seem like your normal witchcraft? In fact, I saw this
exact work in Africa, seem to be Ekon.”
“I know.” Emmanuel replied. “Had a few visits from this one, it was the one
that took Jacob to his grave.”
48 The Palo Muerto

“I see why.” Said Elisha. “Whom do you think is behind it, and why?”
“Exactly the right question.” Emmanuel answers. “But I couldn’t answer it for
you right now. We were fortunate enough to get a visit from the man, but not
much is known to answer why he is doing this. He is from Africa though, so I
don’t doubt his abilities in the Ekon.”
“Have you consulted Eleggua?” Elisha asked.
Emmanuel turned his head away from her, and walked across the Botanica,
picking up the coconut with his left had and walking over to the counter. “No, I
haven’t”
“Why not?” she asked, confused. “Surely if you are uncertain, he can answer
that question for you. Come on now, Emmanuel, you have had such a connec-
tion with him I’m surprised you haven’t turned to him already.”
The bells went off at the door and a short light skin, Hispanic male stood
there. His hair was short, and he looked fairly young, with brown eyes and brown
hair. His eyes had dark circles around them, and was blood shot.
“David!” Emmanuel seemed surprised at the sight of the young man. “I
thought you wouldn’t come until the Tombol”
“I don’t think I will be able to go.” He said, walking across the Botanica and
embracing Emmanuel for a moment. He stepped back and crossed his arms
across his chest and batted them against his chest. He turned to Elisha and did
the same.
“So you flew back from Brazil in time for the burial.” Elisha asked.
“Well, it wasn’t exactly my motive for coming home.” David answered. “Just
the fact that it happened and I was here being a bit too much for me to bear.
Jacob was like a father to me.”
“A father to us all.” Emmanuel said. “But we know that there is a better place
and he is there.”
“Little comfort that brings me.” David said, looking at Luis and June.
“Sorry, my Godsons.” Emmanuel introduced them to each other. “Luis and
June.”
“Alafia.” David said to the two, crossing his arms and patting them across his
chest. “I’m Emmanuel’s god brother.”
“I thought you were about the same age.” Luis said, a bit confused. “How old
are you? 18?”
“No, but I appreciate the compliment.” David answered. “I’m 25.”
“He needs to teach me that little secret of his, looking like a teenager still.”
Elisha said.
“I feel something a bit off in here.” David said. “Something evil and strong.”
 Daniel Vega 49

“Yeah, had you come a few minutes earlier.” Emmanuel said. “Jacob didn’t
die of natural causes. He was attacked by a very powerful Muerto.”
“That’s it?” David asked, looking at the coconut on the counter. He reached
out with his thoughts and read the spirit inside of it. “Ekon, her name is Racheal.
She was murdered in Africa, in fact, her entire family was murdered, except her
son. How did she make it across seas, and in your shop?”
“I don’t know yet, but I intent to find out.” Emmanuel answered, not sur-
prised with David’s ability to read the spirit.
Luis walked across the Botanica and looked out the window. He turned back
casually, and patted June on his shoulder.
“Padrino.” Luis interrupted their conversation. “We’re gonna take a walk. Do
what you got to do, and we’ll be back.”
“Everything okay?” Emmanuel asked.
“Yeah, everything is cool.” Luis said. “Just have your reunion, and we’ll be
okay.”
Luis opened the door and stepped outside, June following behind him.
Together they quickly made their way down the street with Luis in the lead.
“Damn, what’s the rush?” June asked.
“I just saw that guy.” Luis answered. “He cut down the street. I wanna find
out where he’s going.”
“What guy?” June asked.
“The guy that came into the Botanica the other day.” Luis answered. “Joseph,
the one that sent the Muerto after Jacob.”
“Why didn’t you tell Emmanuel?” June asked. “I mean, I think this is some-
thing he should be dealing with.”
“Don’t worry.” Luis said. “Nothing’s going to happen, we just gonna find out
where he’s going.”
Luis cut down the street on the corner. Joseph was walking across the street
with his Palo Muerto in his hand. The street was big, with a town house on the
opposite side, and a parking lot across the street from it. Joseph had walked along
the side of the parking lot, unaware of their presence.
The two of them crossed the street, tailing Joseph at a distance, walking as he
cut down the street and climbing up the steps to a corner house right next to the
parking lot. He was so close to the Botanica that it all begun to make sense.
Joseph opened the front door, unlocking it with a key first and walked inside.
Luis and June walked over to the house, Luis sneaking onto the porch and
looking through the window. He could see Joseph lay his Palo Muerto against
50 The Palo Muerto

the wall, and begin to walk up the stairs to the second level. Suitcases were laid
out on the floor, along with symbols inscribed on the floor in cascarillia.
“What is all that shit on the floor?” June asked, kneeling down next to Luis.
“Looks like the same kind of shit Emmanuel draws.”
“Protection.” Luis answered. “To keep evil spirits out.”
“Then how does his spirit go in?” June asked.
“It’s not the same.” Luis answered. “On the other side of the table, he’s the
good one, and we the evil ones. For whatever reason he is doing what he’s doing,
he seems justified in his own mind. His spirits seem to follow him for his
motives.”
“What the hell could possibly be his motive?” June asked.
Joseph walked down the steps, a towel on his shoulder and his shirt was off.
He walked over to the luggage that was scattered about and pulled out a shirt
from inside one of the suitcases. After looking at it, he looked over his shoulder
toward the window. Luis and June ducked to avoid being seen.
“Shit, he saw us.” June said.
“To hell with it.” Luis replied, creeping over to the door and opening the
screen door.
He was about to knock when it opened. Joseph stood there a bit stunned, his
shirt over his shoulder.
“We left things unfinished.” Luis said, positioned in a stance to strike.
June walked over and stood beside Luis.
“This isn’t the way we deal with things.” Joseph said, stepping out on the
porch. His physic was muscular, appearing as though, had it come down to a
fight, he could clearly handle himself. “I made Babalo, if you guys think you
could actually cause me more harm then I endured in that ceremony, then by all
means, be my guest.”
“What the fuck you talking about?” Luis said, stepping closer until they were
sharing the same air. “You think I couldn’t break your face open right here? I’ll
box you up and ship your ass back home.”
“Hostility?” Joseph said, a smirk on his face. “I see my Padrino was right about
all of you. You are all confused little witches that do not understand the essence
of being what we are. Either way, do what you came here to do. I’m sure that you
both will have a harder time then you expected.”
Luis saw the spirit of the misshaped man materialize behind Joseph, his body
shifting in an unhuman fashion.
“Let me knock this nigga out!” June said, attempting to push pass Luis, his
hands clenched in a fist.
 Daniel Vega 51

“No.” Luis said, holding his hand out to keep June away. “He’s right. It’s not
that kind of battle. Joseph, right, that’s your name?” Joseph nodded his head.
Still, hadn’t moved from his position. “Well know this, when the time is right, it
will be me, not my Padrino, that will bring you down. Your Muertos, your Ekon,
nothing will save you from me.”
“If you feel that this is something you must do then do it.” Joseph said, a grin
on his face. “I’m sure that Jacob probably had the same ideas in mind before he
reached his end. You are a long way off from facing someone of my caliber, little
witches. Run back to your Padrino, both of you, and seek his shelter. When I
turn my attention on the two of you, then you will truly understand horror.”
Luis turned around, walking down the first step, June right behind him.
Without notice, Luis turned and slipped past Joseph, running into his house.
“Hope you don’t mind me using your bathroom!” he yelled over his shoulder,
aware that Joseph was right behind him.
He darted into the bathroom, slamming the door and locking it as he did.
Joseph banged on the other side for a moment then started kicking the door. Luis
looked around and noticed a black doll, dressed in white and black clothing. He
smiled with his back holding the door closed and picked it up, pulling a necklace
from around the dolls neck and placing it back down. With a grin on his face, he
reached over and flushed the toilet.
Joseph nearly flew into the room as Luis opened it before his shoulder came
crashing against it. Though he managed not to find himself flying through the
room, he couldn’t keep himself from falling to the ground. Luis stepped over him
and ran down the stairs, laughing as he burst through the screen door.
“What the hell are you doing?” June asked, not knowing how to processes all
of Luis’s odd behavior.
“Just evening the playing fields a bit.” Luis said, smiling at the bottom of the
front steps as Joseph came charging onto the porch.
“What have you done?” Joseph demanded, attempting to conceal a metal pipe
behind his back.
“Violence?” Luis Mocked. “I see your Padrino was right, you are confused
witches that don’t understand the essences of what we truly are.”
Joseph’s shoulders relaxed, and he began backing up to his door. He looked
down at Luis and June. They could feel the rage within him. He turned and
stepped back inside, slamming the door behind him as he did.
They both began walking back to the Botanica, after crossing the parking lot,
June looked back over his shoulder.
“What did you do back there?” June asked.
52 The Palo Muerto

“I took his Muerto from him.” Luis answered. “He had it feeding in his bath-
room so I took something from it. Something I can use to talk to it later, though
right now he won’t be able to do much with it.”
“How did you do that?” June asked.
“I was first a Palero.” Luis answered, pulling the neckless out of his pocket and
holding it out for June to see. “Paleros have a strong connection with Muertos,
and we know what we need to blind or take someone else’s.”
“So that’s the Muerto?” June asked.
“No, it’s a charm he had on its physical representation of it.” Luis answered. “I
pulled it off its neck before he was able to get through the bathroom door.”
They approached the Botanica, and walked in, Emmanuel turned his head
and looked both of them up and down, holding his gaze on them.
“What are the two of you up to?” he asked, folding his arms over his chest.
Elisha leaned on the counter, and David’s eyes opened wide.
“Why we gotta be up to something?” Luis asked, a grin on his face. “Why
can’t just assume that we went to the store?”
“Luis.” Emmanuel said, his brows coming down, bringing about a sinister
look. “Spill it.”
“Okay, damn man.” Luis said. “This Joseph guy, he was outside when we
left.”
There was a moment of silence, Emmanuel continued to stare at his godson,
Elisha turned her head to avoid laughing out loud. David seemed to be held by
the conversation.
“Luis, you need to just get on with it.” Emmanuel said.
“Well, we followed him home.” Luis said. “It looks like he isn’t even settled in
yet. Got his luggage all scattered in his livingroom, he lives like three blocks from
here, a nice bathroom he got too.”
“You broke into his house?” Emmanuel asked, a bit upset.
“No.” Luis answered. “We looked through his window, then we knocked on
the door. Had a few words, he made a few threats, I used his bathroom. Nothing
really big, just took his Muerto and ran off.”
“You stole his Muerto?” Elisha asked, a smile on her face.
“How did you do that?” Emmanuel asked.
“I wasn’t always a Santero.” A smile spread across Luis’s face. “I was in a life of
crime before you found me. I just used a bad deed to steal something in hopes to
make it right.” Pulling his hand out his pocket, everyone’s eyes fixed on the small
necklace that dangled from Luis’s hand.
 Daniel Vega 53

“That’s my godson.” Emmanuel said, smiling and clapping his hand against
Luis’s. “But the next time you run off after him, I’ll kill you and trap your spirit
in a coconut. You don’t know what that man is capable of doing.”
“Padrino, you need to learn how to relax.” Luis said. “You taught me every-
thing I know, so you should have some confidence in me.”
“Well where is his Muerto at?” David asked. “You took him from this guy, but
where is it at?”
“He’ll come when I call.” Luis answered. “Right now he still with Joseph, but
he won’t be able to communicate with him for a while.”
“Well, he’s down two Muertos and has one still with him.” Emmanuel said.
“He still can do a lot, but I think he won’t be so hasty to try anything any time
soon.”
“This is all a little too much for me right now.” David said, his face covered in
sweat. “I think I need to go rest.”
“Wow. You okay?” Emmanuel asked, putting a hand on David’s shoulder.
David brushed his hand off quickly, then looked up at him.
“I’m fine.” He answered. “Just worn from my travel, and haven’t completely
recovered from all the work that was required of me when I was in Brazil. You
know that their style of Santeria out there is powerful. They transform their
Orisha into these ungodly images to farther torment their victims, and use them
so eagerly. I just need a little rest right about now.”
“Go then.” Emmanuel said. “Get yourself some rest and you know where to
find us.”
“Yeah, I think I’m going to do just that.” David said, Saluting everyone and
making his way to the door. “I’m going to call you tomorrow. Hope by then you
will have found out something on this situation.”
David walked out the Botanica, everyone looked around at each other.
“What shook him up?” Elisha asked. “He couldn’t wait to get out of here.”
“Well, you know David.” Emmanuel said, shrugging his shoulders. “I
wouldn’t worry about it too much, he always was a bit strange.”
 4

Emmanuel stood before his alter, lighting candles in front of colorful bowls. His
bedroom windows were opened, smoke from a mental incense burner escaped
through it. After placing candles in front of each Bowl, he dusted them off, and
picked up his Elekes that rested beside the red and black bowl and placed them
around his neck.
He turned to the statues that had been resting on the altar, and picked up the
glasses of water that had been resting in front of them. After several trips back
and forth from the sink and to the altar he had completely replaced every glass
with fresh water. He stepped back from the altar, looking at every figure and
every bowl.
There was Eleggua, with his sopera red and black sticks hanging off of it. The
statue of baby Jesus sat next to it. To his right was Chango a red and white Sop-
era, with Santa Barbara sitting atop of a white horse. On the left of the Eleggua
was a Gold and Amber sopera, Oshun, with an image of a woman standing on a
boat with a baby in her arms. He moved from each Orisha, assessing, assuring
that everything was in order.
He turned as his cell phone rang atop his bedside table. He stood up and
walked over, Elisha’s name flashing on the caller ID.
“Alafia.” He greeted as he answers.
“Alafia.” Elisha responded from the other side. “How are things with you?”
“Well, everything seems in order.” He answered. “I’m going to open the
Botanica in an hour, was just spending some time with the Orisha.”

- 54 -
 Daniel Vega 55

“Oh, okay.” She said. “Well I’ll stop by later. I need to pick up a few things,
and I need to attend to some work myself.”
“Just got back and already working.” Emmanuel said, laughing as he did so.
“You never change, don’t know how to just relax a bit.”
“Oh well, look who’s talking, Mr. I gotta open the Botanica.” She laughed. “I
need to keep myself focused and this woman needs some help. That’s what we’re
here for, right?”
“Yeah, you’re right.” Emmanuel answered. “Stop by then sis.”
“I will, love you, Alafia.”
“Alafia.” He said, hanging up his phone.
Placing his cell phone in his pocket, he turned his attention back to his altar
and inspected it. He nodded as he looked it over, after a few prayers begun to get
ready to open his shop. At his front door he touched each of his pockets to make
sure he wasn’t forgetting anything, then opened the door.
He smiled as he stepped out on his porch, June sitting there, waiting for him
to come out. He locked his door then begun walking down his steps.
“How long have you been here?” he asked, June lifting his head which rested
on his crossed arms which rest across his legs.
“Oh shit.” June said, looking up. “I think I nodded off. I don’t know, I saw
the smoke coming out of your window and could smell that stuff. I didn’t wanna
knock so I just wanted.”
“Don’t worry next time, just knock on the door.” Emmanuel said, stopped at
the bottom of his step facing June. “I could’ve used a little help cleaning my altar
off.”
“Well next time I know.” June said, standing up. “You mind if I roll with you
today? I really don’t feel like sticking around here.”
“Sure.” Emmanuel said, pulling his car keys out of his pocket. “Come on,
Elisha is supposed to meet me there a little later on, and I’m sure Luis will poke
his head in later too.”
They both approached Emmanuel’s car and sat inside. The two sat in silence
as they made their way to the Botanica. June’s mind drifting slowly away from
the mechanical sound of the turn signal as they waiting for a traffic light to
change green. He turned his attention to the beads that Emmanuel wore around
his neck, and as he felt the car begin to move again, he laughed to himself.
“Am I missing something?” Emmanuel asked. Still, focused on the traffic.
“Just that everything seems strange yo.” June answered. “All of this, it’s like a
tornado picked up my house a few days ago, and dropped me off in the wizard of
oz.”
56 The Palo Muerto

“I know just what you mean.” Emmanuel replied, as a grin stretched across his
face. “Try being the wizard for a few days.”
“I want to get into this.” The anxiety escapes as June spoke. “It feels right to
me. The past few days, everything that happened seems like everything in my life
was leading me up to these last few days. What do I have to do? Could you be my
Padrino?”
“That’s a big commitment you want to make.” Emmanuel answered. “If you
really want this, then I will ask the Orisha when we get to the Botanica.”
Emmanuel looked over at June, and felt his anxiety pouring from him. He
remembered the feeling he carried when he first stepped a foot into solving his
special gift as a child. He stopped the car at a red light and looked over at June
who had been staring out the passenger side window, his hands folded on his lap.
He took his attention away from him, and realized that a smile had stretched
across his face.

21 Years ago
Sitting on the plane, Emmanuel kept his hands folded on his lap, his thumb
attempting to whip away the sweat that formed in his hand. Everyone had been
in their own little world, either reading, sleeping, or staring off into space.
Emmanuel turned his attention to the little boy that had been running up and
down the isles of the plane, attempting to lighting his mood. He leaned forward
when the child was close enough and whispered to him.
“Stay still!” Eleggua laughed loudly when he heard Emmanuel.
“Why?” he asked. “You think I’m bothering these people?”
Eleggua climbed up onto a man’s lap that had been reading a book and begun
to make noise in his ear. The man stared straight at his book, unaffected and
unaware of the child that normally would have been pestering him.
Emanuel chuckled to himself, and looked over to the other little boy that had
been sitting next to him, watching him the entire time.
“Is he always that annoying?” the kid asked, looking over to Eleggua.
“He’s funny, that’s my best friend.” Emmanuel answered, a smile across his
face. “We have a lot of fun together.”
The kid rolled his eyes, and looked over to Jacob who had been seating two
seats over, separated from the two by a little girl.
“He thinks that he’s helping us.” The kid said, the anger was clear in his voice.
“He thinks that we need him to make things better in our life. I don’t need any-
one to make me better. I just wanted to be left alone.”
 Daniel Vega 57

“Why are you here?” Emmanuel asked, the kid tried to answer, but Eleggua
cut in.
“Because he can see us too.” He answered. “He tries to ignore it so much that
it’s been making him sick. So he is going to Africa with us, and the three of you
are going to go through a very special ceremony together.”
“Yeah, well I don’t see anything special about it!” the kid snapped. “I wanted
to stay home with my mom.”
Eleggua vanished in front of their eyes and reappeared next to the kid, his
words startled the two of them as they hadn’t expected it.
“You’re tired and need some sleep.” Eleggua whispered, and watched as the
kid slowly slips into sleep.
“How did you do that?” Emmanuel asked excitedly. “That was like magic!”
“In a way it is magic.” Eleggua answered. “I’m not just a little boy that likes to
play around. I am very old, older then Jacob. This is David, and like you, he is
going where I come from. When you get there, you will come to understand
everything you need to know. All the secrets of all things magical in your eyes.
With me at your side, nothing can get in the way of your dreams.”
It was a very long flight, but the bumpy ride in the jeep had grown to be just
as long. Driving through rough terrain, the four of them braced themselves as
best they could, attempting to keep themselves from banging against the roof of
the car.
“I’m sorry kids, I know this has been a long ride, but we will be there soon.”
Said Jacob.
It was as he promised, though it didn’t come a moment sooner then Emman-
uel would have liked it to come. The Jeep came to a stop, as it cleared through
the wooded surroundings, and just ahead of the clearing a small village could be
seen. Stepping out, the hot air seemed to intensify, and the eyes of the natives
could be felt.
“Everyone, stay close to me.” Jacob said, looking straight ahead at the natives.
“These people are friendly, but to outsides or those they don’t know, they can be
highly aggressive.”
The kids all gathered together a few feet away from Jacob. The intensity of
onlookers eyes fell upon them. Emmanuel found his hand slipping into Elisha’s.
He looked over to Jacob who had been staring at a man wearing red and white
garments.
“I don’t like it here.” The little girl said, her grip on Emmanuel’s hand tight-
ening. “These people look scary.”
58 The Palo Muerto

“There’s nothing to fear.” Jacob assured them. “These are good friends of
mine, but we must be aware of their customs.”
The man in red and white approached them. Jacob greeted him by crossing
his arms and pounding them against his chest.
“Back so soon?” the man had asked, his English though understandable, was
very rough. “I see you bring children this time.”
Emmanuel looked to Eleggua, who had been standing only a few feet away
from the man, with a smile spread across his face. All fear had fled from his heart
as he looked upon his smile, and waited to see what was so important about this
dirt village on the other side of the world.
After placing his hand on the shoulder of Emmanuel and kneeling to look into
the child’s eyes, shivers run up Emmanuel’s back as he heard what was spoken
next. “Eleggua has his hand on this child.” The priest looked up to Jacob and
nodded. “The child is aware and gifted with sight. He will be great, but we must
first consult with Eleggua himself.”
He moved over to the little girl, smiling at her, and placed his hand on her
shoulder. “Yemeya.” He said. “She has the power of the Ocean on her, and the
love of the mother in her heart. She will heal and bring many to the faith.”
He moved over to David and placed his hand upon his shoulder. “This one
has Chango, and his strength flows through him. I also feel a powerful Muerto
with him.”
“Can we consult Eleggua?” Jacob asked. “All of these children have a gift that
has been working through them. If they can learn to control it now, then imagine
how many people they can help in the states.”
“Bring the spirit back to the US.” The man said as he laughed. “A place with
no spirit, I too, believe it would be a wonderful thing. Come then, let us consult
the Orisha.”
Emmanuel sat crossed legged along with the other children in a large tent
made of some kind of animal skin. For being a tent, it was large and spacious.
The bed rolls on the floor seemed patted and large, almost giving the feeling of a
real room. They all faced the man, who had stones resting on a wooden altar,
smoking rising from incenses’ burners, blood splashed on the stones atop the
table.
The man lifted shells from the altar and begun speaking in his tongue, rolling
the shells in his hand. He stood in front of Emmanuel and tapped the shells on
his head, then dropped them on the floor. He looked down at the shells, and
back up at Emmanuel before picking up the shells and repeating the processes.
 Daniel Vega 59

Once he was satisfied, he moved over to Elisha and repeated the processes, then
to David.
He placed the shells down and looked to Jacob.
“They must all be crowned.” He said, sitting on a bedroll on the floor. “This
one you call Emmanuel has a powerful connection to Eleggua and through him,
will accomplish many wonderful things. Elisha must be crowned to protect her
from her own gift. She is like an opened door which spirits good and bad can
walk through. With Yemeya on her head, she will have the power to over come
those spirits and make her way through life. David is confused with many voices
speaking to him. Chango can give him the power to control those voices and shut
out the ones that need not speak with him.”
“When can we begin the ceremony?” Jacob asked.
“We can begin today.”

June and Emmanuel walked into the Botanica, and opened the store for busi-
ness. The two spent about an hour together cleaning the shop. Luis walked in
with his normal cheer.
“Wussup, wussup?” he greeted with a smile spread across his face.
“Luis.” Emmanuel acknowledged him as he lifted his head up from behind the
counter. He finished placing some items in the display then rose to his feet. “I
need you to look after the shop, while I consult June.”
“Consult for what?” Luis asked, a bit concerned. “Something wrong?”
“No, nothing is wrong.” Emmanuel answered. “I’m going to put him on his
path today.”
June smiled, and blushed slightly. Luis smiled back and formally greeted his
God brother.
“So you decided to accept the Orisha.” Luis said. “It’s a decision you never
gonna regret. I promise you that. Right now you’re dead, but when you get
crowned, you gonna know what it means to live.”
“Come on June.” Emmanuel said, opening the door to the back room. “If you
need me June, knock on the door.”
The two walked into the back, a small shrine was revealed to June for the first
time there. An Image of a child sitting on a wooden chair, rested on the altar,
with candy around him, and small toys. Candles were lit all about him, and the
smell of incenses was strong.
They came to a table and the two sat down, a small bag was on the table they
sat at and Emmanuel picked it up, empty the contents into his hands.
60 The Palo Muerto

“These are the mouth pieces of the Orisha.” Emmanuel explained. “You will
learn to speak and understand them through these. That is, unless you develop
the gift of sight.”
Emmanuel began to rub the shells together in his hand, and spoke in an
unknown language before dropping the shells on the table. He looked the shells
over before repeated the processes. After he was satisfied, he looked up and smiled
at the young man.
“Chango has his hands on you.” Emmanuel said. “And it seems that he is
pleased to receive you. Today I will have Luis perform a spiritual ceremony for
you, then you will receive your Elekes. What you are going to need to do, is bring
a complete set of white clothes to me. Everything has to be white, down to your
underwear, and you will need to dress like this for seven days. Can you manage
that?”
“Yeah, that’s cool.” June answered. “So, who’s Chango?”
“Chango is a great warrior, and a king.” Emmanuel explained. “There are
many Pakatis of Chango that you will learn of in time, but the basics are he is the
thunder god. It was said that when he died, thunder fell from the skies to smite
all his enemies. There are other tales that say he is fire, the son of Agayu, god of
Volcanos. You will have to keep your ears opened to learn everything there is to
learn about him, but know that he is great. The victories he had will inspire you,
and you will be pleased to know he was the ultimate player of his time.”
June smiled. “Holla, Chango.”
They laughed together and walked out the back room. Luis looked over at the
two “Everything good?”
“Yeah, everything’s great.” Emmanuel answered. “I’m going to need you to do
a rompimento later.”
“For him” Luis asked, pointing at June.
“Yeah.” Emmanuel answered. “Who else?”
“What exactly do you do in a Rompimento?” June asked, a bit curious.
“We prepare a bath for you, using herbs from Santeria.” Luis began. “Then we
rip the clothes off your back and pour that bath over you, taking away everything
that was negative or any work that people have done to you.
“Then you dress in all white, and we give you Elekes. You wear them, we take
the old clothes wherever the Orisha wants them, and you dress in white for seven
days.”
“Why you gotta rip my clothes off though?” June asked, blood rushing to his
face. “That sounds like some old homo shit.”
 Daniel Vega 61

“Chill out nigga.” Luis said, a smile spread out on his face. “It’s important to
rip the clothes off you, cause we breaking everything away from you at that
moment. Until you do it though, you ain’t gonna understand it.”
“Why don’t you go with him to get his clothes?” Emmanuel asked Luis. “The
two of you can talk about it while you shop.”
“Yeah, come on.” Luis said, taking June by the shoulder. “I’ll even buy it for
you.”
The two of them walked out the Botanica, Emmanuel enjoying the comfort of
the silence as the two of them left. He knelt down behind the counter and fin-
ished stocking the display. He moved about the shop, conducting business with
customers, and filling the shelves until the bells drew his attention to the door,
and Elisha walked in.
“Alafia.” Emmanuel greeted her with a smile at the door.
“Alafia.” She said, with her formal solute. “David’s right behind me.”
“David?” Emmanuel repeated. He turned to the door as David walked in and
approached.
The two of them embraced each other with a formal solute.
“I’m sorry that I left the way I did yesterday.” Said David. He leaned on the
counter, while putting his hand into his pockets. “I was really exhausted from all
my travels and all my work.”
“It’s cool.” Emmanuel said, patting his shoulder. David moved away slightly
from his touch. “It wasn’t an easy time for us. Still, isn’t but we’ll get through it.”
“I know Jacob is looking down on us.” David said with a grin on his face.
“After all, he even managed to save me! I remember how life was for me back
then, and how I am now. It’s funny how all of us changed when he came to us.
He was a large stone in the river that made the water split, even though we still
went to the same place, we all were redirected and touched forever.”
“I couldn’t have said it any better myself, brother.” Emmanuel Agreed.
“I’m curious to know what you been up to all these years, though.” David
said, smiling, apparently coming back from his flashback. “I heard from Elisha
and know of her travels, but you been here this entire time.”
“Yeah.” Emmanuel began. “Things have been very good with the shop and all,
but lately there’s been an increase of evil forces. Four years ago, I was performing
house cleanses and helping Santeros with their ceremonies, and now I’m pulling
Muerto’s out of houses with enough power to kill humans.”
“Come on Emmanuel.” David laughed. “Muerto’s don’t haunt houses and kill
people like that. It takes years for them to inspire someone to kill themselves, or
even help a brujo to bring illness. I never saw a one actually kill someone.”
62 The Palo Muerto

“Well it happened.” Emmanuel insisted. “And that’s exactly what happened

to Jacob. With all his training and his skills, one strong enough got into his house
and killed him there.”
“What did you find out about that situation?” David asks, licking his lips.
“Nothing yet.” Emmanuel admitted. “I feel a sense of stillness in Joseph, so I
haven’t been pressed on the issue.”
“Well keep looking.” David said, pushing himself off the counter. “I would
love to be part of taking down the person responsible for the death of Jacob. He
was a pure soul, and what happened to him was beyond evil.”
Elisha walked across the Botanica and placed her hand on David’s forehand as
she saw the sweat was dripping down his brow. His collar was already wet, and
the pits to his shirt as well.
“I think you’re coming down with something.” She said, moving her hand
from his forehead to his neck.
“I’m fine.” David replied, pulling her hand away from him. “Just the change
in climates. That’s all. It’s gonna take me awhile before I’m used to the states
again.”
“Well do something for yourself then.” Emmanuel said, his eye brow arched
as though his statement was obvious. “Take whatever you need, you know we’re
family.”
“No, everything’s quiet all right.” David said. “I see that the two of you are
still old women. You two still making a big deal out of nothing.”
“Okay, let me ask you then,” Emmanuel begun. “About this Orisha from Bra-
zil. You said that they are shaped into demonic images to torment people?”
“Oh, yeah.” David answered. “At first it was frightening to see them, trying to
help the people out there, and all of a sudden you see these horrible spirits appear
and lounge at you. Once I found the commonalities between them and the
Orisha we know, it was easy to undo the harm they do to one another. Believe
me when I say it was battle after battle.”
“I’ve come across some witchcraft from there.” Emmanuel admitted. “I know
how negative it can be, in fact, let me show you something I been keeping until I
solved its mysteries.”
Emmanuel walked behind the counter and lifted an old black cloth, which
appeared to be wrapped around an object. The dust on the cloth was evidence of
how long it had been hidden away from prying eyes. He placed it on the counter
top, gently, its weight alone strained the glass.
“A man brought this with him from Brazil, but never had the time to prepare
it.” Emmanuel started. “He brought it to me, hoping I could prepare it for him,
 Daniel Vega 63

but it was a mystery to me. He gave up and left it with me, so I stashed it. Eleg-
gua tells me that it’s powerful, but that it if you don’t control it, then it can con-
trol me.”
Slowly, the head of Eleggua emerged from under the black cloth as Emmanuel
unwrapped it. The stone head he placed behind the doors of people’s house he
had cleansed, but atop it was a black horn. All sorts of stones begun to reveal,
embedded in this Palo, with red and black beads tightly wrapped around it until
it came to a handle in the center of the palo.
The handle itself seemed to be made of some kind of animal skin, then it con-
tinued with more black and red beads, until crystals could be seen embedded just
at the base of it, before another black horn could be seen. It was about three feet
long, and weights about a good 10 pounds.
David looked at it, and took back for a moment. Elisha looked at him, then
down at this Palo.
“Jesus, David.” Elisha began. “If I didn’t know better, I would have thought it
scared you.”
Emmanuel noticed that David appeared to be sweating more then he had only
moments ago.
“I dealt with this before.” David said, looking down at the palo. “The guy I
saw used it, was very evil, and used it in everything he did. The Eleggua in the
palo was completely opposite of the Eleggua we know. He is mean, evil, and hun-
gry. I would be very careful with it, Emmanuel. This is a different kind of
power.”
“Well, I’m not sure if I would prepare it.” Emmanuel said, Placing it back in
the cloth. “Do you know how to prepare it?”
“Well, the man I knew said he prepared it with rum and tobacco, but said that
you can use blood.” David explained. “He told me that he wanted to use blood,
but was scared himself. You know Eleggua looks right in your heart and measures
your cause before he works. He said he was afraid that Eleggua would see his
intentions and make everything back fire, so he wouldn’t feed it blood.”
“Here I thought there was gonna be this long ceremony to prepare it.”
Emmanuel laughed. “I’ll consult with Eleggua when I get some time, and see if
he wants me to use it.”
Emmanuel placed it back behind the counter, and turned his attention to the
door as a woman walked in. She paid little attention to them, and begun selecting
candles and other artifacts from the shelves.
“So what of your godsons?” Elisha asked. “Are you doing anything with
them?”
64 The Palo Muerto

“Yeah.” Emmanuel answered. “June’s going to get his Rompimento tonight,

and receive his Elekes. Kids got a great heart, and a gift deep inside him that he
needs to see for himself. Working with these kids, makes me remember how we
were all those years ago in Africa.”
Elisha laughed and patted David’s arm.
“Africa, how could we forget.” She said, noticing David smile. “I think that
they celebrated the day we flew back to the states. With my crowning, and
David’s situation with his Palo Muerto, they probably did work so that we never
go back!”
“Oh, the Palo Muerto!” Emmanuel said, laughing and noticing David looks
down to the floor. “I thought David was evil before his crowning, but that day!”
“Ignorance isn’t an excuse for our mistakes sometimes.” David replied. “I was
young, and naive then, far from where I am now. I let my pride get to me at an
age when I didn’t even know what pride was.”
“Oh, it got to you.” Said Emmanuel. “It got to you and about 30 other people
that day.”

21 years ago
David walked through the old burial grounds ahead of Emmanuel and Elisha. He
looked around, noticing all of the many spirits that roamed around, unnoticed to
the eyes of those that reside not a quarter mile away. He could hear as they called
to him, yearned to speak to him and tell him all that they experienced in life.
“Just grab the dirt from the head of the grave and the base of the grave.” He
said to himself, recalling the words of his god father. “Easy enough.”
He looked up atop of a mound, and noticed a man that resembled his godfa-
ther. He was dressed in a black robe, with strange symbols on his face. Power
seemed to flow from him, filling David with a warmth he never remembered
experiencing before. He walked up to the mound and spoke to this strange spirit.
“Naive.” It said, its lips hardly moving, the words forming in David’s mind
rather then reaching his ears. “You would be wise to fear me, young one.”
“Why?” David asked. “You don’t look mean, and others are close enough to
help me.”
“You are walking down the path of Santero.” It said, bending to look face to
face with David. “Then allow me to help you become as great and powerful as I
once was in life. Take the soil from this mound, my grave. Don’t show anyone
though, people are scared of me because I was once very powerful in life, though
I’m shown little respect.”
 Daniel Vega 65

“What’s your name?” David asked, playing in the dirt, and concealing some in
a small leather pouch given to him by his Padrino.
“I was known as Armon.” It said. “Remember this name, and call on me when
they are preparing to bring down your Muerto. It will be me, which will come
down and become one with you. Many great things you and I can do together,
even exceed Emmanuel.”
“How do you know about him?” David asked. “Have you spoken to him?”
“No.” Armon answered. “But your anger toward him reflects in your heart.
Go to them. They draw near, and soon we will be united.”
David turned, and ran over to joining the others. They all gathered around a
small area of the burial ground which had been sectioned off from the rest. The
old Priest knelt down, and withdrew shells from his pouch. He began to roll
them as if they were dice. After a few moments, he turned and spoke to them.
“This is the place we will draw the dirt from.” He said to the child. “Take the
dirt as I told you, and don’t forget to remember the name on the stone. This will
be your guide for the rest of your life.”
Emmanuel looked over to Eleggua, who had already be sitting on a grave, and
beckoned for him to come closer. David noticed that Emmanuel had been fol-
lowing the instructions Eleggua had been giving him, while Elisha had been fol-
lowing the instructions the old man had given her. David smiled to himself, and
knelt down by a grave for a moment then rose to his feet, walking over to the old
man.
“All seems well.” The old man said, with a smile spreading across his face.
“Let’s go back to the village and complete the ceremony.”
They walked back to the village, David running his hand over his head, now
completely shaved off before their ceremony last week. They all were crowned
Santeros, and in a phase that was called a “Yawo” meaning Righteous man. These
next few days are intended to gather all that they will need to take back with
them to the states, which has already been explained to them.
Elisha was the first that Padrino chose. Having her standing in front of the
tribe, the staff known as a Palo Muerto was held tightly in her hand. The small
hole, which was made at the top of the cane, was now sealed, holding the grave
dirt along with other things sealed inside that staff. The stain of blood was all
over it, feeding their Muertos before calling them down to “meet.”
Padrino knelt next to her, speaking in her ear, then stepping back. She looked
so confused and uncertain, but slowly begun pounding the Palo Muerto against
the ground. Her lips moved, mouthing the name of her Muerto, and the speed
which she pounds the palo Muerto to the ground begun to quicken. She closed
66 The Palo Muerto

her eyes, and repeated the processes before her eyes shot opened wide, and she
looked at her arm as though it was a deadly snake.
“Its okay Elisha.” Their Padrino shouted. “Your Muerto has come down and
is controlling your arm, continue.”
She repeated chanting its name, and her knees buckled from under her before
she fell on her back unconscious.
David was called forward, as a woman lifted Elisha in her arms and pulled her
off to the side. His Padrino knelt beside him and smiled at him.
“Don’t be frightened.” He said to David. “You are going to bring your
Muerto down on you, so that he can speak to you at all times. What you must do
is pound the Palo against the ground and call to him, concentrate on him, feel
him and want him to come to you. Don’t stop pounding your palo until I tell
you to, okay?”
“Gotcha.” David said, smiling to himself.
David licked his lips and grabbed the palo tightly in his hand. He lifted it and
brought it down on the ground hard, whispering the name Armon. He looked
ahead of him, and seen the image of the man he saw on the mound three days
ago. He called to him and pound the Palo Muerto on the ground, harder and
faster.
“What is he saying?” Jacob asked, leaning in to hear the name David had been
calling. “I thought the name he was supposed to be calling was…”
“Armon!” The priest interrupted, signally for a man who had been watching
opposite of them. “Armon, Armon!”
The man’s eyes widened, and he lunged forward for David.
Just then, the image of the man vanishes before David’s eyes, and a bright
light came down on him. He felt his body burn, and welled up with strength. His
hand continued to move without David’s consent. He could hear Armons words
in his head as though they were his own thoughts. He looked off to the side and
seen a man lunging for him, but as his body crashed into him, he noticed that he
hadn’t budged.
He looked into the man’s eyes, and felt a hatred well up inside. Words came
to his mind, and before he realized what was happening, they were escaping his
lips. The man’s hair turned instantly white, and deep wrinkles formed under his
eyes as he gasped for air.
David felt his body turn to the old priest, and as he spoke, his voice was that of
Armon.
“Justice will prevail!” he said, stretching his hand out to the old man, and
watching him gasp and fall to a knee.
 Daniel Vega 67

“Emmanuel, you must listen to me.” Eleggua spoke in his mind. “You have to
stop Armon. I can take over your body, but you have the skill to do this. You
must approach David from behind, grab his shoulders and bring him down to his
knees. I will tell you the prayer as you bring him down that will pull Armon out
of him.”
Emmanuel begun to walk forward, and felt his own hands tighten around his
own Palo Muerto. David turned and noticed him approach, out stretching his
hand to him.
Emmanuel felt his legs stiffen slightly, and a pressure develops on his shoulder.
“Keep walking!” Eleggua ordered in his head. “I will protect you from his evil
influence.”
Emmanuel continued to approach David, noticing his eyes widen in shock
from the strength shown.
“Who is this?” Armon’s voice demanded an answer within David’s mind.
“How is he managing to fight against me?”
“That’s Emmanuel.” David answered. “He is the son of Eleggua, and from
what I know, he was born with a special gift that allows him to communicate
directly with Eleggua. I’ve seen it, he talks and plays with him all day.”
David felt himself back away slowly, but suddenly a sharp ringing sound came
to his mind as Emmanuel’s lips moved. He could feel Armon was still with him,
but couldn’t communicate with him. He felt as though his legs had turned to
stone, and felt himself slowly falling.
Emmanuel placed his hands on David’s shoulders and slowly pushed him
down, speaking in that strange language again, as Eleggua instructed. He could
feel the hatred that Armon held toward him, and feel a power emitting from
David’s body.
“Hold on!” Armon’s voice was faint, and David could feel his hand attempt to
grasp his palo Muerto tighter, but didn’t have the strength. Light filled his eyes,
then all faded to black.
“I don’t believe it!” the old priest said, raising to his feet. “He stopped
Armon!”
Emmanuel watched in amazement as his Padrino approached him, knelt
down, and kissed his hand. He looked around and noticed that everyone had
been kneeling, and several people had been kissing the floor.
“You have done, what took 15 of us to do!” his Padrino explained. He turned
his attention to David, who had been unconscious on the ground, then rushed
forward and ripped the palo Muerto from his hand. “This has to be taken care
of.”
68 The Palo Muerto

“What happened?” Jacob asked, still confused with the entire ordeal.
“Armon, must have tricked David into switching the dirt from the graves.”
The priest answered.
“Who’s Armon?” Jacob asked.
“He was a priest that lost his way a long time ago.” The priest said, looking
down at the palo Muerto in his hand. “He was the greatest priest I have ever seen
in my life.” He looked over at Emmanuel. “Well, up until today.”
 5

Emmanuel and Luis broke plants into a large bowl of water, June sat in a chair
watching. The door was locked to Emmanuel’s house as they prepared for this
ceremony, only the television provided sound, soothing June’s anxiety.
“I think it’s about ready.” Luis said, stirring the contents of the bowl with his
hands. “You ready June?”
“Yes sir.” June answered, turning the television off and rising to his feet. “We
doing this or what?”
Luis picked up the bowl and the three of them proceeded up stairs, June hold-
ing onto a bag, a white sleeve sticking out of it. They entered the bathroom, and
walked over to the bathtub.
“What do I do?” June asked, dropping the bag to the floor.
“Just stay there.” Emmanuel answered, looking down to Luis. “You ready?”
“You know it.” Said Luis, as he forced June to step into the bathtub.
Luis grabbed the collar of June’s shirt and ripped it off, chatting prayers in
Spanish. June just watched at first, before he began too felt dizzily. He felt Luis’s
hands slide into his waist line and begun ripping his pants off of him. The
ground felt as though it was moving under his feet, and his knees begun to
buckle.
Music seemed to fill his ears, not only from Luis’s lips as he began to sing a
song to honor the Orisha, but June could faintly hear drums beating in his ears.
Luis threw June’s pants on the ground as he ripped them away from him, feel-
ing the strain of ripping away all the negativity away from him. He grabbed at his

- 69 -
70 The Palo Muerto

boxers and ripped them off him, then pulled his shoes and socks off, throwing
them on top of the pail of clothes June had only moments ago been wearing.
Emmanuel handed the bowl to Luis, June’s eyes stared straight ahead of him,
though he wasn’t focused on anything that was in the room. Raising the bowl
over his head, Luis poured the contents down on Luis.
June felt the air escape his lunges as the cold fluid poured down over him, he
could feel the hair on the back of his neck stand on end, and for a moment he felt
a touch on his shoulder. More water came down on him, and the air again
escaped his body and he felt himself gasping for air.
“I know it’s cold.” Luis said, with a smile on his face as though he enjoyed it.
“Shit’s cold, nigga.” June said, pulling air into his lunges.
“My fault. We gotta do it one more time though.” Luis said, pouring the rest
of the bowl over his head, before dropping the bowl on the floor.
“Brush yourself off.” Instructed Emmanuel. “Brush your shoulders off, push-
ing away from you, then your arms, your legs, and your feet.”
June started, watching Emmanuel for guidance, and once he was finished, he
dried himself off and stepped out the bathtub. He was handed the white clothing,
and put them on.
“Good.” Said Emmanuel.
They all walked down the hall to Emmanuel’s bedroom, June looked around
at all the statues and Soperas Emmanuel had on his altar. His head spun, he felt
warm, and welcoming feeling takes over him.
“It took me by surprise the first time I came in here too.” Luis said, after see-
ing June’s entire demeanor change. “You can feel the Orisha really strong in
here.”
“That’s what that is?” June asked.
“Normally, you’re never allowed anyone to see them, or know what you
have.” Emmanuel said, sitting down on his bed, and pulling out Elekes from the
desk at his bedside. “If someone wanted to cause you harm, they only need to
know what Orisha you have on your head. If someone where to get close enough
to them, then they can put something inside your Sopera and cut them off from
you. You are my Godson though, and I have all the trust in the world in you.”
Emmanuel rose to his feet, and approached June. Six sets of Elekes dangled in
his hand as he faced him, and he lifted the red and black ones up in front of June.
“This is Eleggua.” He said, holding the beads out and tapping them to June’s
head. He pressed one end to the center of his chest, the other to his shoulder,
then shifted the end to the other shoulder. He held them out for June to grab and
 Daniel Vega 71

placed them in his hand. Just as June took hold of them, Emmanuel knocked
them out his hand. “Pick them up, kiss them, and put them on.”
June looked a bit surprised, but did as he was instructed. He watched as
Emmanuel repeated the processed with every Eleke, remembering the names. All
white was Obatala, the gold and Amber were Oshun, the white and red were
Chango, the two shades of brown were Oya, and the clear and blue was Yemeya.
“You don’t drink or use any drug wearing them” Emmanuel explained. “I
know that your just leaving the streets but it’s important that you leave anything
that can weaken you behind. The only time you take these Elekes off is for the
three the S’s. Sleep, showers, and sex.”
June smiled, and touched them on his neck. “Aiite, not that I’m tryna fuck wit
them on anyway.”
“Chill.” Luis said, tapping June’s chest. “You’re standing in front of the
Orisha, have some respect.”
“It takes time to accept everything, I know.” Emmanuel said, sitting back
down on the bed. “But right now is a good start. You will dress in all white for
seven days, and you will sleep on white sheets. This is a time or purification, and
you will honor it. I told you that your crown will be Chango, so speak to him,
develop a relationship with him.
“Know that you will be tested, evil spirits will draw to you and try to stop you
from coming to this path. Don’t give in to them, and seek my advice or Luis’s if
you ever feel something wrong. I know that you might be a little upset with these
rules, but they are to better you, and make you stronger.”
“Na, I don’t have any problems with that.” June said, shrugging his shoulders.
“I asked for this, so I agree. Does this make me a Santero?”
“No way!” Emmanuel said, laughing. “If it was that easy, everyone would be
one. This is a start though, but the ceremony to become crowned last for seven
days, and your purification is for one year. We’ll get you there though, but right
now you have to start learning and take the other steps first.”
Emmanuel smiled as he saw noticed June’s eyes shining in the candle light. It
wasn’t the light that made them shine, but the touch of the Orisha on him, that
had begun to open his eyes. He could see the Aura around him changing, becom-
ing lighter, reflecting his mood changing to a more positive one.
“Listen. I just want to take the time to thank you.” June said, looking back
and forth from Emmanuel to Luis. “I know you probably heard this many times
before, but I really feel as though you saved my life. I wish Chris was still alive. I
would have brought him to you so he can become a Santero with me.”
72 The Palo Muerto

“I know you do.” Emmanuel said, Luis walked over and looked out the win-
dow. “I would have loved for that to have happened but we all walk toward our
own fate. This is your fate, your lesson, and you are facing them like a true man.
You should be proud of yourself, and stay strong.”
“Listen, Padrino.” Luis said, pulling the necklace out of his pocket. “I got
something to do, to our little friend.”
Emmanuel remembered the necklace, and nodded. “Just call me if you need
anything. I expect to see you at the shop tomorrow.”
“You know it.” Luis said, saluting them and walking out the room.
“I think I’m gonna head home too, Padrino.” June said, smiling as he caught
himself calling Emmanuel his Padrino without realizing it. He lowered his body
and saluted Emmanuel.
“Right.” Emmanuel said, saluting June. “You always lower yourself to your
elders. I’m glad to see that the spirits are already guiding you.”
Emmanuel laid in bed, feeling good about himself as he recalled the past few
days. It saddened him that he lost a life long friend, but seeing that he was follow-
ing his footsteps, comforted him. The battle with the spirits, the war with this
Joseph’s character didn’t seem to be the highlight of his thoughts. In fact, they
were the farthest thing from his mind right now. The pride he had for June, was
what made him feel good about himself.
Reuniting with Elisha and David is also made him smile. How he longed for
them to come, he couldn’t help but think. Staring at the ceiling, and watching
the light flicking from the candles which rested aside his Soperas slowly set a
comfortable atmosphere, and he found himself drifting into sleep.
“Remember.” A voice whispered in his ear. “Remember that night.”
“Jacob, is that you?” Emmanuel asked, just before he slipped into uncon-
sciousness.

21 years ago
“When did you first see him?” Jacob asked David, sitting together with Emman-
uel and the priest. “How did you come across Armon?”
“He was at the mound in the burial site.” David answered. “I spoke with him
when we went to collect the dirt.”
“What did he tell you little one?” the priest had asked, looking at the Palo
Muerto of Armon, which laid out on the floor in front of him.
“Well, he seemed okay to me when we spoke.” David said, as innocently as a
child could. “He said he was once a great Santero, and that he was going to help
me become great too. I took the dirt like he told me too.”
 Daniel Vega 73

“Did I not tell you that I would choice the place?” the priest asked, the anger
was evident in his tone. “Why would you disobey me?”
“I thought that it would be okay.” David replied. “Since he was a Santero too.
I don’t know why you think he is so bad. He was friendly, and he liked me!”
Jacob eyed David, noticing that he had become defensive to the resentment
shown for Armon. “We have rules to keep everyone safe, David. Armon was not a
good guy in life. He killed a lot of innocent people, including children. He was
lost to the power that he was telling you about, and in the end, he had to be put
down.”
“Well he seemed like a good friend!” David spat, looking at the Palo in front
of the priest. “What are you going to do with MY palo Muerto?”
Emmanuel looked off to the side, Eleggua stood there silently listening. He
turned to Emmanuel, and nodded his head as though he resolved the issue in his
mind. “Destroy it.”
“Eleggua said that it must be destroyed.” Emmanuel repeated to the priest. He
listened to Eleggua’s words before continuing. “If Armon is made to be kept in
his state, then someone else, someone who has a stronger connection can do
greater harm with him.”
“You can’t destroy him!” David protested. “He is MY friend. You’re afraid
that Armon will make me stronger then you, Emmanuel. You’re trying to stop
me.”
“Armon’s influence over this little one is strong.” Noted the priest. “He must
be cleansed in the river, and brought back to us. We will create a new Palo, as he
needs it, and Armon will be destroyed as Eleggua ordered.”
“Grab the Palo, Emmanuel.” Eleggua’s words were strong and urgent in
Emmanuel’s mind, he leapt forward as Eleggua instructed. David had lunged for
the palo, but it was too late, as Emmanuel pulled it away.
David’s eyes flashed with anger as he saw it in Emmanuel’s hand, and he
charged at him, tackling him back, his back came down to the floor hard, and the
Palo slipped out his hand, smacking against a wooden chair. Jacob rushed for-
ward and pulled David off of Emmanuel, who kicked and shouted, before he was
carried out the tent.
The priest reached over and helped Emmanuel to his feet. He held out his
hand to ask for the Palo, and as he extended it out, he noticed a deep chip that
developed a long crack in the Palo.
“I will consult with the Orisha myself, to determine the fate of Armon.” The
priest said. “It will mostly be destroyed, but must be done at the correct time. Go
now, and study.”
74 The Palo Muerto

The night was young as Emmanuel knelt beside of Elisha, over looking
David’s ceremony. The fire in the center of the village was bright, as it was on the
night he brought down his Muerto. David stood there, pounding his new palo
Muerto and calling a name out. No one could hear the name, but knowing that it
was not Armon that he had been holding, brought Emmanuel, a sense of com-
fort.
David begun to shake, and feel on his back, his new palo in his hand. The
priest ran over and knelt aside of him, satisfied that he had been giving the correct
tool for his life as a Santero. Jacob sat off to the side, watching as he always was,
Emmanuel knew that he meant the best for them all, and felt safe with him there.
A man came from the priest’s tent, holding the palo Muerto of Armon in his
hand, and held it out to the priest who accepted it. He held it over his head for
everyone to see, David begun coming too, and sat up, watching the priest. With-
out notice, the priest turned and threw the palo in the fire, stepping back as
everyone watched it consume in flames. He looked down to David, and nodded,
as if to say, everything is okay little one.
David gripped his new palo Muerto tightly, and for a moment, Emmanuel
could have sworn that he had cradled it against his chest as he watched the other
Palo Muerto burn. It was gone now, and he felt better.
A year past, and finally the three children sat on the plane heading back to the
states. Jacob was already sleeping, and Elisha spoke softly to Emmanuel. They
both looked over as a stewardess had been scolding David for getting out of his
seat, but he seemed to ignore every word she said. Right after she walked off, he
slipped out of his seat and ran over to join the two.
“We are Santeros!” David said, his pride welling up in him. “And I can’t wait
until I’m home eating my mom’s food. Home food!”
They all laughed together, and Elisha’s face turned sober.
“Let’s make a promise.” She said, waiting until the two were looking at her.
“Let’s promise that no matter what happens when we get home, we will always be
brothers and sisters. I don’t ever want to lose you two, and want us to always be
like we were in Africa.”
“You know you will always be my sister.” David said, putting his hand on top
of Elisha’s.
“You’re my sister forever.” Emmanuel said, putting his hand over the two oth-
ers. “And you’re my brother. Forever.”
The three of them smiled at one another, as the stewardess approached and
grabbed David’s shoulder.
 Daniel Vega 75

“I thought I told you to remain in your seat!” she snapped, pushing him back
to his place.
He jumped back in his seat then looked up at her, as he picked up his Palo
Muerto that he left on the chair. Emmanuel laughed, noticing that he didn’t pack
it away, but choose to carry it on the flight. The stewardess attempted to snatch it
from David’s hand, but froze in her place as he looked up at her, her hands on
the palo Muerto.
It took only a minute, but she shouted and recoiled from David. Elisha and
Emmanuel looked over at him, noticing the smirk on his face as she backed away
from him, pointing and shouting, “His the Devil, he’s the Devil!”
Emmanuel chuckled, knowing how difficult his brother could be, and smiled
back at David as he shook his head at the woman. Two security officers came out
and attempted to calm the stewardess, but failed at the attempt. One of them
drugged her to the back, and closed the curtain, a few moments later she was
silent. When the curtain opened, the woman was sleeping in her seat, and a new
stewardess came out in her place.
“David.” Elisha said. “Always starting something.”

Shooting up in his bed, Emmanuel found himself covered in sweat. He looked

around his room, and after glancing over his Soperas, relaxed his body.
“Remember.” The voice came again to him.
 6

Joseph stood in his dark basement, facing a round table, which held seven small
glasses surrounding one large glass. Each was filled with water, and the center
glass hand a crucifix in it. Behind the glasses was a male doll, dressed in green and
black clothing. He knelt before it, writing a name on a brown piece of paper,
placing it on the floor.
The floor seemed cold against his knees, and aside from the light coming from
the opened door at the top of the stairs, only candles illuminated the basement.
Joseph looked to his right, at a box that had been sitting there, the top closed. He
reached in through the flaps on the box, and pulled out a rooster. He placed it in
front of him, and grabbed a bottle of rum that was at his left. Filling his mouth
with rum, he sprayed the rooster with the rum, and picked up a knife.
He grabbed the green and black doll and placed it in front of him, chanting in
Lucumi. Taking the knife, he cut the head of the rooster off. He held the body
over the doll, forcing the blood to fall on it. His voice rose and fell as he chanting
in this language, shaking the dead animal to make sure all the blood had been
spent from the creature. He places it on the floor, and pressed down hard on its
back to crack the spine, preventing its dead body from flapping and kicking.
Picking up the head of the rooster, and the paper he had written on, shoved
the paper into the mouth of the bird. He took his knife and turned the body of
the bird, cutting it open and sticking the head inside. His chanting seemed to
change as he grabbed a threaded needle, and stitched the birds body closed.
He took red ribbon and begun to tie the animal’s wings and legs together,
despite the fact that it had already been dead. Rising to his feet, he walked across

- 76 -
 Daniel Vega 77

his basement, approaching a large aquarium, where in was an adult rattlesnake.

He lifted the lid, and quickly grabbed the animal by its head, and pulling a
syringe out from a box aside the tank.
He pressed the snakes’ head tight, until its mouth was opened, exposing its
fangs. He pulled the top of the syringe off, and inserted the needle in the poison
sac, extracting its deadly venom. A smile was spreading out across his face as he
returned the snake back in the aquarium, and walked back over to the table,
kneeing down. He began speaking in this language, now it seemed more like he
was talking to someone, rather than singing.
He inserted the needle in the body of the rooster and injected the venom
within, then lifted the blood-drenched doll and placed it back on the table. He
took hold of his Palo Muerto, and begun pounding the floor, calling out a name.
This wasn’t the name of any Muerto, but the name of an enemy he was prepared
to attack.
He brought his palo down hard against the basement floor and spoke this
name louder.
“June Santiago!”

June stepped in his bathroom, pulling off his blue shirt, happy that the seven
days had past and he was able to now wear colored clothing. He reached into the
shower and turned on the hot water, waiting until he saw steam rising from the
running water. He walked over to the mirror at the medicine cabinet, and took
off his belt, and unbuckled his pants.
“Shit!” he said to himself, realizing he left his towel in the other room, opened
the bathroom door and ran to his room grabbing it. He walked back to the bath-
room, and closed the door when he caught some movement out the corner of his
eye. He looked over, seeing the mirror, laughing at himself for being suspicious of
his own reflection.
He threw the towel over the shower curtain, and let it hang there, looking into
the mirror and rubbing his face. Pulling the Elekes off his neck, he placed it on a
white cloth he had on his sink, and looked up at his self. He turned to the
shower, and froze in his tracks. He cut his eyes to the mirror and realized that his
reflection did not move with him.
Turning back to the mirror, he thought he had been seeing things as his own
reflection stood there motionless. He reached out and tapped the mirror, but
nothing changed. In fear, he slowly reached for the bathroom door when his
reflection quickly brought up his arms and brought it against the mirror.
78 The Palo Muerto

June jumped back, his back hitting the wall, the medicine cabinet swung
opened and hit the wall. He took a moment to gather himself, before reaching
out and closing the cabinet. To his satisfaction, his reflection appeared to be nor-
mal this time. He opened the door and rushed out the bathroom, straight to his
room.
He didn’t hesitate. He picked up the phone and dialed Emmanuel’s phone
number. It ringed.
“Shit, pick up!” he said out loud, but Emmanuel’s answering machine picked
up.
“Padrino, call me back, its June.” He said, his voice cracking in fear. “Some-
thing strange is going on…”
“He can’t help you!”
June dropped the receiver as he heard his own voice coming back to him on
the phone. He slipped his feet into his sneakers, and opened the closet door to
grab a shirt, when the hangers parted and a woman sprung out with her arms
outstretched.
Her skin was rotten and stiff. With one empty eye socket, the one eye in its
head seemed to swim in its socket. Her mouth was long and opened, as though it
stiffened in that fashion, and was now unable to close. With that, her tongue
hung out her mouth, spit dripping at it’s every move. Her hair was nearly gone,
revealing more of her greyish skin.
June fell back over his bed, and the woman fell on top of him. It screamed. A
horrible screeching scream, and her hands struggled to get a grip around June’s
neck. Struggling against it, he only managed to keep it from getting a tight grip
around his neck, its tongue dangled out its opened rotted mouth.
He brought his fist up against its face, but it took the impact, and continued
its assault. He stared up at it, feeling its cold fingers getting a firm grip around his
neck, and watch its one eye slowly reveal a pupil. It rolled from the back of its
head, and stopped staring straight into June’s eyes.
Fear gripped him, freezing his body in complete horror. He remembered
Emmanuel’s words when he first explained the power of a Muerto. Fear grips
you, you can’t move, can’t talk, you freeze.
He gasped, but felt no air coming into his lunges. His neck seemed to burn,
this fowl creature’s hands turned from cold too hot in an instant.
“This is it for me.” June thought to himself. “It’s going to choke me to death
and I can’t even move.”
“You can’t move because you believe in it.” A voice came to his ears. It was a
strong and powerful voice, and the fear in him seemed to change. “If you believe
 Daniel Vega 79

it’s choking you, then you will only succeed in allowing yourself to die. Call on
me, believe in me, and its power will fade.”
He moved his lips, but no words came out. He knew he still believed this crea-
ture had power over him, and moved his lips again.
“Chango!” June managed to allow the name to escape his lips, but faintly. He
felt the hands of this creature lessen. “Chango!” he shouted out this time, and it
seemed to glide off him in an inhumanly way.
It stood in front of him, with its arms stiff at its sides, and turned to face right
of June. He noticed that its legs nor hips moved, almost as though it was a stiff-
ened corps that was animated by an unholy power.
Weakly, June turned his head, and seen a tall dark man standing there. The
light reflected off its gold chain and crown, and as it stretched out its hand
toward the creature, it turned its body in the same inhuman fashion, and ran into
the closet.
June watched the clothes flew off the hangers, and noticed the creature disap-
pear through the wall. He could hear its screeching moving to the next room,
then the bathroom, and glass broke. Slowly feeling his strength returning, he
looked out his room door to make sure nothing was there, before slowly creeping
through the hallway.
Peering into the bathroom, the mirror to his medicine cabinet was shattered
into small pieces. He felt his head spinning, then air wraps around him. He
hadn’t noticed it until his body came down heavily against the floor. He tried to
fix his eyes on the banister to the stair, but his vision begun to fail, then all was
black.

Drums. Struggling to focus on what he was hearing, June knew it had to be a

drum, but they sounded as though they were playing miles away from him. He
heard a rattling noise, then felt something soft caressing down his body. It started
from the top of his head, down his shoulder and to his hand. It came again, this
time down his head, to his chest. He knew the gentle caress ended at his feet.
He opened his mouth and chuckled lightly, the caressing to his feet was tick-
lish. Opening his eyes, all was blurring, but the light revealed the silhouette of a
man standing over him. The sound of drums faded, and as he strained, he saw
the image become clear.
“Padrino.” June managed to force the name out. He hadn’t realized how tired
he was. “What’s going on?” He saw the feathered fan that Emmanuel was waving
from his head down his body, a maraca in his other hand.
80 The Palo Muerto

“Try not to talk just yet.” Emmanuel answered, placing the fan and maraca
down. He dipped his hands in scented water and placed them on June’s forehead
then neck. “You took a very powerful hit. To be honest with you, I don’t know
how you managed to survive.”
The image of the woman leaping from his closet came to June’s mind
instantly, and he could remember the entire ordeal.
“Chango came to me.” June answered. “He did something to chase her off.”
“Can you sit up?” Emmanuel asked, as he began propping June up, to rest his
back against the headboard of the bed. “Here, drink this.”
June took the cup from Emmanuel’s hand, it was hot, and the content was
brown. He sipped at it, the warmth spreading through his body, a sweet taste in
his mouth. He hadn’t realized how cold he had been, until the hot tea begun to
provide him warmth. For the first time he realized that he had been in Emman-
uel’s bedroom.
“How did I get here?” he asked.
“You called me, and left a message on my machine.” Emmanuel answered.
“You never hung the phone up, so when I heard the ruckus I ran to your house.
You were past out on the top of your stairs, with your shower still running, so I
carried you here.”
“You could have brought me some clothes.” June said, trying to cover himself
up, realize how truly cold he had been.
“Don’t do that just yet.” Emmanuel said, stopping him from covering himself.
“We’re far from finished. Whatever attacked you, imprinted you with an evil
energy, that’s where the cold is coming from. It’s taken me three days to get you
to come around.”
“What the fuck!” June said, putting the empty cup on Emmanuel’s bedside
table. “I’ve been here for three days?”
“Don’t worry about that.” Emmanuel said, putting his hand to June’s fore-
head then neck. “The warm is returning to your body now. Luis’s should be here
soon with something for you to eat.”
“So what do we do now?” June asked. “How did everything happen? I was in
my bathroom and my own reflection tried to jump through the mirror at me!”
“I know.” Emmanuel said, forcing a smile. “I saw everything when I was in
your house. Your mother was scared, but she knows you’re in good hands. Joseph
sent that to you. I don’t know how, or why, but he brought this about.”
“That was some scary shit!” June said, he could feel his strength returning to
him now, pushing his body farther upright in a sitting position. “I thought I was
 Daniel Vega 81

going to die. If I didn’t recall what you told me happened to Jacob, I wouldn’t
have called to Chango.”
“You were wise.” Emmanuel replied. “And I’m truly proud of you. But I have
some other news for you, it might be a shock to you, but it’s a surprise. I hope
you would be happy to hear about it.”
“What?” June asked, with a smile on his face. “You got some strippers in the
other room that’s gonna come give me lap dances until I feel better? Cause, shit
Padrino, if that’s the case, Ima be here for a while.”
They both laughed, and Emmanuel felt relieved that June had turned around
and was his old self again. He was glad to see that June hadn’t noticed the rings
around his eyes, crying and praying for the strength to save this young man. He’d
come to far to let him be taken by the wicked men in this religion.
“We’re going to Cuba.” Emmanuel said. “I will have you crowned there.”
“We?” June said, looking a bit confused. “Hold up, Padrino. Why we going
all the way to Cuba?”
“Well for one,” Emmanuel begun. “Crossing the ocean will remove all the evil
energies on you. There are too many distractions here in the state, and I need
your ceremony done correct.”
“When we going?” June asked. “Shit, Padrino I don’t have any money for this
trip.”
“In a few days.” Emmanuel answered. “I have everything covered though, so
don’t worry about money. You can repay me, if you feel some kinda way about it,
when you are better.”
“Damn.” June closed his eyes, and let his body slide back down the bed board.
“This kinda sucks.”
“What?” Emmanuel asked, a bit puzzled. “I thought that you wanted this.”
“Oh na, I do.” June said, looking up at Emmanuel for a minute, then closed
his eyes and laid his head on the pillow. “It’s just that I was really hoping you did
have some strippers in the other room. It’s been a while since I got any, and now
you gonna fly me around the world without me draining the pipe.”
They both laughed. Emmanuel shook his head, rising to his feet. He walked
across the room, placing the fan atop his altar, turning to face June.
“A typical Chango you are.” He said. “Nearly died three nights ago, and all
you can think about is sex.”

Luis helped June down to Emmanuel’s basement. Though he was feeling a bit
like his old self, he still lacked the strength to walk on his own. Luis lowered him
82 The Palo Muerto

to sit on a chair, then turned his attention to Emmanuel, who had been standing
with his Palo Muerto in hand.
“Aiite, so what we doing?” June asked, trying to keep his tone happy, and
excited.
“Just giving our friend, Joseph, a little something to keep him busy.” Emman-
uel answered. “If we leave, and he had time on his hand, then he can hurt people
we leave behind. So we have to keep him doing what we want him to do.”
“Aiite, so what do we want him to do?” June asked.
Luis started laughing, then patted June on the back. “We want him fighting
for his life.”
Emmanuel moved a large paper bag he had next to him, and pulled out a
small skull. It looked like the head to a reptile, but it was large in size. He put his
hands in the bag and pulled out, several, small zip lock bags, containing different
colored powders, put them on the floor in front of him. Luis ran up the stairs, a
moment later returning with a large box.
“Did you get it?” Emmanuel asked Luis.
“You know it.” Luis said with a smile, pulling out a white cloth from his
hooded sweater. He unrolled it, revealing a white T-shirt. “I took it from his suit
case. Joseph should really learn to lock his windows.”
“You broke in his house?” June asked, laughing. “You crazy.”
“Fuck it.” Luis said. “He tried to kill you! He’s lucky I didn’t wait on his steps
wit a pistol and blow his brains out.”
“That’s not how we do things, Luis.” Emmanuel said, looking through his
bag. “We fight fire with fire.”
“I know, Padrino.” Luis said, kneeing down next to him. “So what are we
doing?”

“Did you take care of his Godsons?” The American was quick and to the
point, looking straight into Joseph’s eyes. He could feel the fear, and respect that
Joseph carried for him, though his demeanor didn’t reflect it.
“I did the young one.” Joseph answered. “I poisoned his soul, and sent my
Muerta at him. Unless they find the work, he will die. I think that Emmanuel
and Luis will find themselves consumed in saving him, long enough for you to do
what you came here to do.”
“Don’t let pride consume you.” The American said, sitting down on a chair.
The shadows in the house seemed to surround the American, concealing his face
from eyes that may have been watching. “You do not know the power that
 Daniel Vega 83

Emmanuel has. If we are to be successful, then we need to be cautions, and swift.

We will show them no mercy.”
“Padrino.” Joseph started, his tone hinting at his curiosity. “With all your
power, I do not understand why you insist I remove the others first. Why not just
attack them straight on? Are you afraid that Emmanuel is stronger then you?”
The American brought his Palo Muerto down on the floor hard, the house
vibrated with the thunderous impact. Joseph felt his heart leap from the sudden
display of anger.
“I fear no one!” The American snapped at Joseph. “And you would be wise to
never suggest such a thing again. I’ve planned and calculated this attack for
longer then you could ever imagine. It will go as I have predicted, or I will lose
everything. Should that happen, I will personally see to it that you lose everything
with me.”
Joseph swallowed, wanting to protest, but feared the consequences that may
follow. He stepped back as the American rose to his feet, turning as though he
was looking through the very wall that held up the house.
“They are working.” The American said, his eyes focusing on Emmanuel,
Luis, and June as they spoke in the basement of Emmanuel’s house. He looked at
the wall as though it was glass, and on the other side, they all grouped together.
“June is there, and he is safe. You assured me that everything was taken care of.”
The American backed away from the wall, the shadows in the house seemed to
follow him, keeping him concealed with a cloak of evil.
“I thought the plan was to keep them occupied.” Joseph replied. “June took a
fatal hit. No amount of work will help him to recover.”
“Yes, I see.” The American said, noting the dark energy that surround the
young man, sitting in the chair. “You’re done well, but what they seem to be
doing it preparing an attack on you!”

“Why don’t we bury him in the cemetery?” Luis asked. “We can do the work
in Palo, and try to keep him to weak to work.”
“He’s too smart, and too strong for that…” Emmanuel stopped, and looked
over his shoulder. He gasped, and rose to his feet, walking across the basement
stopping in front of the wall.
“Padrino.” Luis said, looking at Emmanuel oddly. “What’s wrong?”
“They’re watching us.” Emmanuel said, looking straight ahead of him.
His basement wall seemed to be gone, and in its place, he could see straight
into Joseph’s house. He wasn’t there alone, but accompanied by the American
who had been there the whole time with Joseph. He noticed that some dark
84 The Palo Muerto

power had moved with the American, shadows protecting him from prying eyes.
Joseph was staring straight at him, but he felt as though he couldn’t see the
vision.

“He’s aware of us.” The American stated, as Emmanuel stood facing them. It
almost appeared that had he took another step he would walk right into the room
with them. “You underestimate his skills and power, Joseph. If you are not care-
ful, you won’t have to worry about my punishment on you, but his revenge on
you.”
The American begun chanting softly, rasing his Palo Muerto, then brought it
down against the ground, and pointed it at the vision of Emmanuel’s basement.

Luis rose to his feet, shock drowning away all emotion in his mind. Wind
seemed to blow through the very wall Emmanuel had been facing. He looked up
and noticed that the window to the basement was closed, but the wind begun to
intensify. The bag on the floor overturned, and begun drifting to the back of the
basement.
“Padrino!” June shouted in fear. “What the fuck is this?”
Emmanuel was chanting, rising his own Palo Muerto, he brought it down to
the floor and pointed it back at the vision of Joseph’s house.

Joseph felt all the hairs on his neck rise, and fell to his knees in fear. Wind
seemed to be blowing through the very wall that the American had been pointing
his Palo at. His luggage blew against the wall slowly, but the wind only intensi-
fied, sending his clothing blowing around the room as though a storm was devel-
oping in his house.
“Padrino!” Joseph screamed over the winds. “What manner of witchcraft is
this!”
The American stomped his foot against the floor hard, leaning against the
wind with his Palo Muerto still outstretched toward the vision. He appeared
completely enveloped in his concentration.

Emmanuel leaned against the wind, aware that they were both at a stale mate.
At this rate they could battle for hours. Strength welled up inside of Emmanuel
and suddenly a child was standing in front of him.
“Attack the shadow around him!” Eleggua’s words were calm, yet powerful in
Emmanuel’s mind. “He fears that you will see him, his illusion is the only safety
he has.”
 Daniel Vega 85

Emmanuel brought his foot against the ground heavily, and his chanting
begun to change.

Joseph looked in amazement, as the winds begun to lessen, and smiled.

“My Padrino is stronger then him.” He thought to himself, confidence return-
ing to him. He looked over to his Padrino, noticing that the unholy shadows that
had always followed him had begun to slowly fade away. “Padrino!”
The American felt the light penetrating his mask of shadows. It was important
to remain unknown at this point, under no circumstance could Emmanuel learn
of his identity. His chanting changed, the shadow on him now struggling to
spread over him.

“Now strike!” Eleggua commanded.

Emmanuel’s chanting changed, and he slammed the Palo Muerto against the
ground with power.

Joseph could do nothing to prepare himself, as the winds lifted his body off
the ground and slammed him against the wall. To his surprise, his Padrino’s foot-
ing gave wall, and he too was sent flying across the room, striking the wall with
great force. Both of them were helpless against this power, both pinned with their
backs against the wall.

“He’s giving in!” said Eleggua, encouraging Emmanuel. “Don’t stop!”

Emmanuel’s chanting and concentration sharped. He noticed the shock and
pain on their faces as they stood stuck on the wall. Luis and June were amazed,
now able to see what it was Emmanuel had been struggling with. The wind that
had nearly overcome them had subsided, and they realized it was their enemy,
that was now a victim to this force.
Emmanuel noticed the shadow envelop the American, and he brought his
hand up with his Palo Muerto.
“He wouldn’t dare strike in that way!” Emmanuel whispered.

Hope had escaped the American, but he felt his anger giving him new
strength, new power. His art had failed against a direct assault against Emmanuel,
and this allowed his anger to overcome him.
“He will not defeat me!” the American yelled, raising his Palo Muerto, he
threw it at the vision.
86 The Palo Muerto

Emmanuel thought that the Palo Muerto would come through the vision, and
rose his arms to shield him from the impact. It stopped short, striking the vision,
a force sent Emmanuel flying back. He came against the floor hard, and looked to
see that the vision was gone. In it place, a large scar, evidence of the battle that
had just taken place.
Joseph and the American slide off the wall, the winds subsiding. Joseph gasped
in amazement, for where his Padrino’s Palo Muerto had struck, now had a huge
crack running up the wall. He walked over, touching the wall as though it were
not real. A smile spread across his face, and he tried to guard his thoughts.
“He’s no fool.” Joseph thought to himself. “Padrino isn’t stronger then
Emmanuel. He brought me here because he’s afraid of him! He needs me more
then I need him.”
 7

“We’ll change over in Florida, then fly straight to Cuba from there.” Emmanuel
explained to Luis and June. “We can’t fly straight to Cuba any more.”
David reclined his seat back, resting his Palo Muerto between his legs, to keep
it from falling. Emmanuel looked over at him and laughed.
“Don’t start picking on any stewardesses.” He said, watching as David turned
with a smile. “We can’t have the devil on every flight we take together.”
“Not tonight.” David said. “Besides, she had it coming. You know how long I
wanted to come home? It was frustrating to have her keep nagging me like an
adopted step child.”
“What did you do to her anyway?” Emmanuel asked, still smiling. “Elisha and
I have been wondering what you did to her for years.”
“I showed her something.” David answered. “I showed her what she most
feared. In that instant she touched me, I showed her the plane falling out the sky
and crashing. I showed her how I would stand over her burning body, laughing as
she slipped into the after life.”
“Don’t you think that was a bit harsh?” Emmanuel asked.
“Not as harsh as a 30-year-old stewardess, nagging at a 6-year-old child.”
David laughed, as he rested his head back and closed his eyes. “People would be
wise to leave well enough alone. She didn’t learn that lesson until she met an
extraordinary child, one that could care less if she slept soundly at night or not.”
Emmanuel looked around the plane for a moment, everything seemed quiet.
He turned back to David, looking at the Palo Muerto in his lap, and shaking his
head.

- 87 -
88 The Palo Muerto

“You love that Palo Muerto, uh.” Emmanuel asked.

David shot his head up and threw his jacket over it to conceal it. “Oh, yeah.”
He said, giving Emmanuel a strange look before resting his head back on the
head rest and closing his eyes again. “It brings me comfort.”

Emmanuel dropped his luggage on the floor as he stepped into his hotel room.
He breathed a sign of relief, knowing that the long flight was over, and he would
finally get to sleep on a bed. There were two beds in the room, with a television
on a deep brown dresser, a cheap painting hanging on the wall. A bathroom was
connected to the left of the television, and a closet at the right of the room door.
Emmanuel wasn’t surprised at how cheap the rooms were, since Cuba was
entirely different from America. Hearing that even doctors, in Cuba, worked for
outrageously low salaries, but were provided with housing and necessities, made
him appreciate America that much more. The freedoms he knew he had back
home been worth more, to him, then having a small shack for a home, and tossed
table scraps to feed a family.
Having been here before, helped him very little with understanding how to
get around. He was determined to wait and join his friend in the early morning.
June walked in, dropping his luggage, he falls onto the second bed.
“Finally!” he said, turning onto his back and stretching out. “I think if some-
one offered me one more pillow, I would have thrown up!”
Emmanuel laughed, pulling the pillow out from under the comforter, and
holding it out to June. “Would you like another pillow sir?”
June snatched the pillow out of Emmanuel’s hand and threw it across the
room, then snatched the other pillows out from other the comforter, and threw
them at Emmanuel.
“Fuck you and your pillows, bitch!” He laughed as one hit Emmanuel on the
head.
Emmanuel pulled the pillow out from under the comforter on his bed, and
smacked June upsides his head, June tried to roll off his bed, but got hit a second
time on his back, knocking him to the floor. He laid there, laughing for a
moment, and taking hold of one of the pillows that he threw.
“Oh, this means war!” Emmanuel heard him say, as he stood up biting his
lower lip, clenching the pillow from over his shoulder.
“Uncle!” Emmanuel said, dropping back on his bed. “I think Ima sleep for a
week!”
 Daniel Vega 89

June stood over him, in a position to strike Emmanuel with the pillow, but
Emmanuel just closed his eyes. He heard June whisper under his breath. Opening
his eyes, he looked up at him.
“No mercy.” June whispered, then brought the pillow down on Emmanuel’s
stomach
The two engaged in a pillow fight for nearly five minutes, when his door
opened and Luis stood there. The two of them froze, pillows in striking positions,
both looking right at Luis.
“Didn’t you get enough pillows on the flight?” Luis asked, shaking his head at
the two.
Emmanuel and June looked at each other, then both threw their pillows, hit-
ting Luis in the head and stomach. David came in the room, laughing as he saw
the three of them beating each other with pillows, feathers floating through the
room from the tears in them. The three were panting for air, wasting the last of
their energy swinging the pillows, and laughing from the pit of their stomachs.
The three of them fell back, Emmanuel on his bed, June on his, Luis sunk to
the floor, falling back on his pillow. The three of them panting, laughing, David
walked into the room with a smirk on his face.
“Glad to see that the past events couldn’t break your spirit.” David said, look-
ing the three of them over.
Luis stood up, and picked up the pillow, holding it out to hit Emmanuel with
it again, Emmanuel slides off the bed with his pillow in hand. “Don’t even think
about it!” Emmanuel said, laughing.
“Fuck it!” Luis said, turning and hitting David in the chest with the pillow
and running across the room. David turned only to get hit in the bed by Emman-
uel with the pillow.
“You wanna play rough!” David said, laughing and picking a pillow off the
floor. “Okay, let’s play rough!”
The sunlight came through the parted curtain onto Emmanuel’s face. He felt
the warmth spread on him, opening his eyes and thanking God for another day.
He stretched out, and sat up in his bed. Feathers scattered all over the room floor,
tangled in his hair, on his luggage. He knew that house keeping wouldn’t be too
happy with cleaning up this mess.
He looked over to the other bed, June stretched out on the bed, his pillows on
the floor, he chuckled to see that he meant what he had said last night. He
grabbed the pillow off his bed and threw it, hitting June on the chest.
“Wake up!” Emmanuel shouted. “We got a lot to do.”
90 The Palo Muerto

“I don’t want to go to school today.” June smiled, rolling over, and putting
the pillow that hit his stomach over his head. “I got a headache.”
“A headache will be the least of your problems if you don’t get out of bed!”
Emmanuel said, opening the curtains, and letting the light in the room.
He walked over to his luggage, and pulled out some clothes. After getting the
iron board out of the closest and plugging in the iron, June sat up in his bed.
“I thought I told you that you shouldn’t sleep with your shirt off.” Emmanuel
scolded June, noticing that he stripped down to his boxers. “You can be attacked
in your sleep, and this room has no spiritual protection.”
“Yeah I know.” June said, rolling his eyes. “It got hot as hell though, couldn’t
sleep.” He watched Emmanuel for a minute, ironing his shirt on the iron board.
“So what’s gonna happen in this crowning?”
“Anxiety uh?” Emmanuel asked, looking at him. “Everyone’s always a bit ner-
vous at first. Well, it will be like nothing you ever experienced. You won’t
remember much of what’s gonna happen though, since the process is long, and
you will be overcome with the power of the Orisha. To wrap it all up in a nut-
shell, we’re gonna intone your head to Chango.
“We are going to make you reborn, in a sense, to the Orisha, and cross you
into the life of Santero. This is a life long commitment, I wish we had time for
you to make the decision yourself, but there really isn’t any choice. After what
Joseph did, I can’t let that voodoo just kill you.”
“Yeah, I don’t want that to happen again.” June said, remembering that horri-
ble spirit that attacked him in his room. “To think something like that could
have happened before I came into this. I don’t know what I would have done.”
“Well there is an upside and a down side to this.” Emmanuel smiled. “The
upside is, you will be a full-fledged Santero when you complete your year as
Yawo. The down side is, since you’re not married, you won’t be able to have sex
in a year.” He stuck his tongue out at June. “You will be as a baby for your one
year, eating with a spoon, shit like that. During the seven-day ceremony you can’t
even talk. You will be as a child, and during that time your focus will be to estab-
lish a relationship with your Orisha.”
“That’s hot though.” June said, sitting crossed legged on the bed. He looked
off, distant as though he was seeing himself in the role of a Santero. “When I’m
crowned, and complete my year, what will I be able to do?”
“That’s in your hands.” Emmanuel said, putting the iron down, and taking
his shirt off the iron board. He walked over to the bed and laid the shirt down
carefully. “I would hope that you would use that gift to right the wrongs in the
world as I have. But the truth is, you can do as you will with it.” He threw some
 Daniel Vega 91

slacks on the iron board and prepared to press them. “You can spend the rest of
your life taking care of yourself and honoring your Orisha, or you can go out in
the world and do work.
“You can work to help people to overcome their obstacles, or come to the
Orisha. You could work to force people to do things, like help a woman whose
husband is a cheat, change their ways. The choice is really up to you, but know I
will forever be there for you.”
“I’ll try to do what you do.” June said, looking down at the floor, his eyes not
focused on anything. “I want to help people, and be there to fight shit like I expe-
rienced. I can see myself taking my friends away from the drug life, and helping
my family. It’s like a crazy dream yo.”
Emmanuel laughed, putting the iron down, and lifting the slacks off the
board. “That requires a lot of self discipline. See, when you take part of some-
thing new, that has a great impact on your life, you want to share that with the
people you love. The problem is, not everyone will feel the same as you, accept it
as you did. People will doubt you, think you are crazy, turn away from you. It
takes discipline to stand tall, and rise above everything, having faith that the
Orisha will take care of us.”
“Did that happen to you?” June asked.
“No, it was different in my case.” Emmanuel answered. “I had this gift since as
far back as I can remember. The only friend I had was Eleggua, up until I was six.
Then Jacob came along, and took me to Africa, it was there that I met Elisha and
David. They were the only two friends I had, or even wanted. I was blessed that
they were my brother and sister in Oshea.”
June slides off the bed, digging in his bag and pulling out some clothing. He
turned in time to see the bathroom door close, and signed.
“All, come on!” June said, knocking on the door. “You should let me get in
there first!”
“You snooze. You lose.” Emmanuel laughed on the other side of the door.
“Should have jumped in while I was ironing.”

Pulling up in front of a large house atop of a long road, the four of them got
out of the car and walked toward the small mansion. June looked up to the house
and whistled.
“They living it up over here!” June said, turning and looking at the large mar-
ble statue of Yemeya. “Gotta be drug dealers.”
“Chill out!” Emmanuel snapped. “No one in this house is involved in any ille-
gal activities! You better come to respect that. These are friends of mine, and they
92 The Palo Muerto

agreed to help me get you crowned. The money they have comes from their
involvement with Santeria all over the world.”
June lowered his head and followed everyone to the front door. Luis felt a
sense of pride noticing that June’s behavior reflected that of a child that had been
punished by a parent. How he had come to respect Emmanuel so quickly
touched Luis’s heart. Luis had always admired and loved his god father, not only
for everything that he had given him, but how he looked into him, and seen the
best qualities he had.
Before walking into the religion, many had feared the man that Luis was, and
no one ever gave him the benefit of the doubt. When Emmanuel had, came
across him, and seen the truth in his heart, he felt as though someone believed in
him. Like a father, Emmanuel pushed him to do the right thing, and believed
that he had the strength to do it.
The door opened and a thin man walked out. He was dressed in white, and
had a goatee, accented by his strong cheek bones, and short curly hair. Emmanuel
always noted the striking resemblance he had to Marc Anthony.
“Emmanuel.” The man greeted, as he embraced him and gave him the proper
solute. “I thought you wasn’t gonna be able to make it.”
“Nothing would have stopped me, Jesse.” Emmanuel said, his face lighting up
at the sight of his old friend. “We landed yesterday. We’re staying in the hotel
about a mile down the road.”
“Why didn’t you come straight here?” Jesse protested. “I got this big ass house,
with all these empty rooms, and you gonna go to a hotel. You’re insulting me.”
“Always complaining.” David said, stepping from behind Emmanuel. “I
thought that you would have grown some balls by now.”
“David!” Jesse squinted as though his vision was failing him. “No, it can’t be.
The David I remember was always too good to come hang out with the common
folk.” He embraced David, and saluted, then embraced him again. “Emmanuel
didn’t tell me you were coming.”
“I thought it would be a surprise.” Emmanuel said, patting Jesse on the back.
“Come in,” Jesse invited. “My house is your house.”
They walked into the house looking at the winding stair case, beginning on
each side of the hall, and the large crystal chandelier that hung suspended from
the ceiling. The floor was made of marble, and the banister was brass, with a lot
of art invested in the engraving. Underneath the circular, winding staircase, was
an opening into another large hall.
 Daniel Vega 93

They stepped through, looking at the extravagant couches, and the imported
area rugs on the floor. They all approached the couches, and sat down. They were
set in a circular formation so that everyone could face each others face.
“This is a banging ass house!” June said, looking around to take in the entire
hall. “And this was all made possible through Santeria?”
“You know it.” Jesse said. “That and prostitution. From time to time, I love to
sell myself to the woman in the area. I would do it on a full time basis, but they
don’t let me breath.”
Emmanuel exploded in laughter, David coughing from the statement.
“Who would wanna buy a wet, anorexic chihuawa?” David asked, leaning
back in the couch in laughter.
“There can be money to be made in what we do.” Emmanuel explained to
June. “The crowning is a ceremony that can cost up to $35,000. Jesse here, is
involved in just about every crowning that takes place out here, and with that, a
sizable amount of that money comes to him.”
“How many crownings do you do to get a house this size?” June asked.
“Well, in a month, I can be involved in about 30.” Jesse explained. “Between
that and my internet business, buying and selling Santeria supplies, I do pretty
well for myself.”
“Pretty good my ass.” Luis said laughing. “Put me down with it!”
“So whose getting crowned?” Jesse asked, looking at Luis and June. “Whom
am I gonna get to smack around when they blind folded?”
“Him.” Emmanuel said, pointing to June. “The other one is Luis. We
crowned him in the states. He’s really good, and came far in this religion.”
“I heard about what happened to you.” Jesse said to June. “Emmanuel and I
go back a long way, he brought me to the Orisha and helped me find my way. I
owe him everything I have and some, that’s why we’re doing your crowning at
my expense.”
June’s eye brows came together, looking at Emmanuel in complete surprise.
“What expense?”
“You think that the crowning is free?” Jesse asked, a smile on his face. “It cost
money, not only for the supplies, but for the people we need to assist in the cere-
mony. We need other Santeros, we’re gonna need drummers and dancers for the
Tombol after, and the clothes. You’re being crowned a Chango, and out here, it
cost about seven thousand to make it all happen.”
“If we did it in the states, you could be looking at about 15 thousand.”
Emmanuel interjected. “Lucky for you, I won’t allow anyone to be involved in
94 The Palo Muerto

this ceremony that I don’t trust, and out here, people are more dedicated then in
the states.”
“So, you ready for your baldy?” Jesse asked, rubbing his hands together. “I’m
looking forward to seeing a walking bowling ball.”
June ran his fingers through his hair, and shook his head. “Damn, Man! Fuck
it, let’s do this.”

Placing a doll on the table, Joseph pulled out a bag of dirt, and laid it out next
to it. He looked through a bag to make sure that he had everything he needed,
and took the doll, turning it upside down. He took a knife and made a small inci-
sion, loading the dirt inside of it. He quickly began grabbing items from the bag,
and stuffed it inside of the doll, once he was satisfied, he rolled shells on the floor.
A look of satisfaction took control of his face, and he reached into a box, pull-
ing out a chicken. Without hesitation, he punctured its throat, allowing the
blood of the animal to fall on the doll. Chills run up and down his spin, as the
energy overwhelmed the basement. Severing the head of the chicken, he let the
remaining blood flow from the animal, and onto the doll, before tossing its body
on the ground.
He turned the doll over, and sealed the incision with wax, before sitting it on a
table. He set up six small glasses of water, then a larger glass in the center, setting
a steel cross atop the glass. Smiling at his work, he felt his confidence well up
inside of him.
“Padrino will surely attempt to dispose of me.” Joseph said to himself. “He
needs me now, but when Emmanuel is dead, then he will have no use for me. I’m
the only person that knows his secrets. He will surely attempt to kill me. I’ll have
a card up my sleeve when that day comes, maybe I will have a fighting chance.”

Staring in the mirror, June couldn’t get used to the baldy. He took his hand
and passed it over his bald head, missing his hair already. He turned around and
looked over the many instruments that all seemed so foreign to him. He felt a
sense of pride spread over him.
He walked over, picking up the Palo Muerto, and rubbed his hand over it.
“This one is mine.” He thought to himself. Turning his attention to the Sop-
eras in the room, tears nearly came to his eyes. “I made it through the ceremony.
One year and I’ll be a Santero.”
He looked across the Soperas, reciting the names of the Orisha as he looked at
them. Agayu, Eleggua, the warriors, Osun, Oggun, and Ochosi. Obatala, Oshun,
 Daniel Vega 95

Yemeya, Oya, and Chango. He thought he would have received the crown of
Chango, but as they began his Eta, Agayu came down and claimed his head.
June was surprised to find out that Agayu was the father of Chango, and very
powerful. The Santeros and Santeras there were all amazed at the power shown
on that day. They were behind him now, all seven days, all the ceremonies, and
he was glad that he had the strength to endure them.
A knock came to the door, and he walked across the room opening it.
Emmanuel stood there with that same smile on his face, then walked in and sat
on the bed.
“Well, you’re a Yawo now.” Emmanuel said. “You’re probably the first I know
to exceed so fast through this. I know that time was against us, and the choice was
pretty much forced on you, but it was necessary.”
“I don’t regret it, Padrino.” June said, sitting next to Emmanuel. “If I could
do it all again, I wouldn’t change a thing.”
“I’m glad to hear that.” Emmanuel said. “I know the past week was hard on
you, so we’ll stay here, and leave in the morning. Hopefully when we return
home, our enemies wouldn’t have caused too much trouble.”
“I was meaning to ask you,” June begun. “Why wasn’t David there? I thought,
well hoped, that he would have been apart of it.”
“Well, Agayu was specific.” Emmanuel answered. “When he came down and
spoke, he hand selected the people he wanted involved with the crowning. He
was one of the people that were not chosen to be there. There’s nothing wrong
with that. It could have been that his own crown would have gotten in the way of
things.”
“So now I have to build a relationship with Agayu?” June asked, though it
seemed to be more of a statement. “I thought that Chango and I had a bond,
especially after he saved my life.”
“Well, sometimes one Orisha takes you so far,” Emmanuel explained. “Then
another picks up where the other left off. Chango is still with you though, so
don’t worry. Agayu is your head, but you need to develop a relation with all of
them. The secret to being a great Santero is to know, honor, and respect them all.
Through you, they will do great things, but you have to strive to grow with
them.”
“Things are making a lot of sense to me now.” June said. “Since the crowning
began, a lot of things that happened in my life make so much sense. It’s like I was
dead before, and now I’m alive!”
“If I had a dollar every time, someone told me that.” Emmanuel said, smiling
at his godson. “I would have a mansion, twice this size by now.”
96 The Palo Muerto

“So what’s the plan for tonight?” June asked. “What’s really good?”
“Tonight,” Emmanuel said, grinning. “We celebrate!”

Elisha hummed a song as she cleaned about her house. She always found her-
self cleaning when she was home, always feeling as though the dirt itself was an
enemy. She passed a damp towel removing all the dust from her wooden tables,
and returned it to the kitchen. She opened the refrigerator and removed a yogurt,
walking over and sitting on the couch.
She grabbed the remote control, and turned the television on, kicking her san-
dals off, she folded them in front of her, eating her yogurt. She rocked in her
place, looking at the screen, though her mind wasn’t on the show. She thought
about her god brothers in Cuba, wondering what they had been doing.
The thought of Emmanuel and David away together on a trip made Elisha
realize how much she had truly missed their company. Many thoughts of their
trips to Africa flooded her mind, she shook her head as though she was holding
onto a specific memory.
The air turned chill. Elisha brows came down, and she slowly sat up in her
place. She reached into herself, connecting to her Orisha, when she felt someone.
She wasn’t alone in her house.
“Who’s there?” She called out, rising to her feet. No emotion reflected on her
face whatsoever. “Come out into the light, or do you fear a lonely woman?”
A hand reached out from under her couch and grabbed hold of Elisha’s foot.
She looked down, the skin on the hand was grey, and the smell of death filled the
room. She tried to back away, but only succeeded in helping a woman, crawl out
from under the couch.
Its shrilling screeches filled the room, and a head emerged from under the
couch. It’s long grey hair had nearly all fallen out of its head. Its movements were
stiff, and as its neck and shoulders became visible, its head turned completely
around, looking straight up at Elisha. A long extended jaw, with a tongue hang-
ing out of its mouth, one eye missing from its socket, with blood oozing from it’s
gaping whole. The single eye had been all white, but as Elisha looked down to it,
its pupil rolled from behind its head, stopping to stare into Elisha’s eyes.
“Off with you!” Elisha commanded, watching as it screeching, became fear for
itself.
It quickly backed under the couch, the shrieks seeming to disappear as quickly
as they came. Elisha’s shoulders relaxed, and she turned, preparing to sit back
down and gather her thoughts. She froze as she stood face to face with a man.
 Daniel Vega 97

“There was an easier way to do this.” Joseph said softly, clenching his hand
into a fist. “You could have let her bring you to me, but I see that you have a few
tricks up your sleeve, little witch.”
Joseph’s hand came up, and he brought his fist against her face.
Elisha felt the impact, and as the light begun to fade, she could feel her back
coming down against the floor.

“I can’t wait to get back to the states and open shop!” June said, laughing as he
took his seat on the plane. “You think Padrino will let me work with him?”
“What you mean, work?” Luis asked. “You can’t do any work for a year. You
have to let your Orisha sleep during your time as Yawo. Padrino will keep you
close though, teaching you the arts, so that when your year is up, you know what
you need to do.”
“Oh.” June said, relaxing his shoulders, and lowing his head in disappoint-
ment. “I thought I would be able to do work already.”
“No.” Luis laughed at him, than put his hand on his shoulder. “Don’t be in a
rush to do battle. You seen what can happen, that’s why you got your crown so
quickly. Learn everything you can from Padrino, ask as many questions, smother
him with all your curiosities. That’s the only way you’ll learn what you can and
can’t do.”
Emmanuel looked over at Luis and June, speaking with each other on the
plane. David was getting himself comfortable next to him, his Palo Muerto still
in his hand.
“You have some great godsons.” David said. “June can be great if he takes the
time to learn with an opened mind and heart. Luis, well you did a great job with
him.”
“How come you never took any God children?” Emmanuel asked, turning to
face David. “You’re stern attitude seems like it would have been great for educat-
ing and disciplining Yawos.”
“I have one.” David said. “A young man, but he’s beneath my attention right
now. He learned quickly and grew strong, but lost himself to the art. I don’t
know if he studies now to become powerful for himself, or strong to protect what
he loves.”
“Well why not bring him to met everyone?” Emmanuel asked. “Probably
being around these two would lighten his spirit. I don’t know about you, but
they lighting my spirit every day.”
“I only wish that he could have had a fraction of their spirit.” David said,
looking over at the two. “My godson was struck with tragedy at a very young age.
98 The Palo Muerto

He’s tainted with those loses, and finds himself struggling with himself. The art is
the only focus he has, but trust me when I say, he is capable of some amazing
things.”
“Hello, my name is Amanda and I will be your flight attendant for the
evening.” The intercom amplified her voice throughout the plane.
“No David.” Emmanuel said, leaning his head back, noticing David looking
at him with an arched eyebrow. “I know what you’re thinking. Leave that stew-
ardess alone.”
They both chuckled, David propped his pillow behind his head and leaned
back, closing his eyes.
“The battle has changed!” the words developed directly in Emmanuel’s mind.
He looked to his side to see a beautiful woman in a blue gown. He knew instantly
it had to be Yemeya. “My daughter is in danger. You must help her.”
Preparing himself to ask what had happened, his eyes rolled back and he
passed out.
Emmanuel found himself in a dream. Not any ordinary dream, his spirit was
pulled from his body and taken over great distances, to observe what the Orisha
felt important for him to him to see. Though his spirit was completely aware, his
body had been in a state of sleep.
Eleggua stood at the door, Yemeya stood just right of Emmanuel. He realized
that they had taken him to Elisha’s house. He saw a yogurt over turned on the
floor, and her coffee table flipped over. These were clear evidence to lead him to
believe that this was physical rather then spiritual.
Emmanuel walked over to her kitchen, the feeling of space and time not being
a factor in his spiritual state. Great distances were easily crossed, as though a sin-
gle step could cross him over vast distances. Elisha’s back door was opened, and
he could see drag marks threw her garden.
“Someone kidnaped her!” Yemeya nodded in agreement with Emmanuel.
“But why?”
He felt the Elisha’s energy and walked to follow the trail, his spirit distorting
and bending. He found that the energy had stopped in Joseph’s house. He recog-
nized the place from the vision he had weeks ago with the American. If that
American was anywhere in this house, he knew he would have to be on his guard.
In his current state, it would be easy from him to lose his body forever.
He could feel vibrations coming from the upstairs, and he found himself span-
ning the distance, and appearing in a back room. She was there, and she was alive!
Though bound by thick ropes to a chair, with a black velvet bag over her face, he
knew it to be Elisha.
 Daniel Vega 99

“Sister!” Emmanuel spoke the words, concentrating, forcing them into

Elisha’s mind. “I am aware of your situation, and I come for you! Be careful and
be strong.”

Joseph laid in his bed, staring at the ceiling, aware that he had set things in
motion that he would never be able to back away from now.
“Did I really need her?” he asked himself. “Am I being paranoid with my
Padrino?”
Chills swept through him. A new energy was in his house. He sat up in his
bed, straining to feel this new presence. He thought he knew it, but there was
something strange about it. Elisha!
He rose to his feet, and ran out the room, bursting in the back room only to
see she had been right where he left her. She jumped from the sudden intrusion,
but he could see she quickly became relaxed.
“She thinks she’s in control.” Joseph thought to himself, a grin on his face.
“The things I would do to her, if she only knew.”
He turned to leave the room, but caught movement from the corner of his
eye. He turned around again, facing Elisha, and noticed that there seemed to be
light gathering in the corner. He stepped a little closer, straining to make out
what it was.

Emmanuel took a step back, as Joseph stepped near him. It appeared as

though he could see him, though was uncertain. Eleggua was there as well, but
warned him of nothing, so for this time he knew he was safe.
“He would think that you’re nothing more then a Muerto.” Eleggua said, with
a smile. “You don’t want him to know you’re here so make him believe you are
something else.”
Joseph walked closer toward him, trying to focus his eyes as though he would
see Emmanuel clearer. He held his position, waiting until Joseph extended his
hand as though to touch him, when he stepped closer and locked his eyes on him.

Joseph froze in fear! He felt as though his body wouldn’t obey his own mind.
He tried to open his mouth, but even that failed.
“What kind of spirit is this!” Joseph thought to himself. “This isn’t possible!
I’ve come too far to have a spirit overpower me!”
He heard a shrieking scream behind him, and felt as his Muerto manifested in
the room. It was only a few feet to his right. More fear gripped him. If he had no
100 The Palo Muerto

power to control his own Muerto, pulling it from it’s own grave against its will, it
would surely turn on his too. He pushed his thoughts into its essences.
“Remove this spirit!” he ordered, watching as his Muerto assessed his com-
mand, before turning its gaze to the spirit in the room.

“He thinks you’re a spirit!” Eleggua spoke to Emmanuel. “He commanded his
Muerto to chase you out. Let it. This will keep Elisha safe. He won’t know that
it’s you.”
Emmanuel took only a step back, and he felt the air fill his lunges as he found
himself back in his body.
“David!” Emmanuel elbowed his god brother as he slept in his seat. “Wake
up!”
“We there already?” David asked, sitting up and running his hand up and
down his Palo Muerto. He looked out the window to the plane and seen that
they were still in the air. “What the hell! Why you wake me?”
“Elisha’s in trouble.” Emmanuel said, controlling his emotions. “Joseph
abducted her!”
“What!” David’s voice made all the passengers look in his direction. “What are
you talking about?”
“Yemeya astro-projected me to his house.” Emmanuel explained. “He has her
tied down in the back room of his house. She appears to be okay, but I don’t
know for how long.”
Sweat begun to bead down David’s head, a silent argument appeared to be
going on in his mind. He looked at Emmanuel, then down at his Palo Muerto,
turning it, and leaning on the edge of his seat.
“This can’t be right!” David said. “Why would he…She has nothing to do
with…”
Emmanuel looked at David oddly. He appeared to be trying to work some-
thing out in his mind. “What is it?”
“I need to use the restroom!” David said, standing and pushing past Emman-
uel. He leaned heavily on his Palo Muerto, using it as a cane.
He walked into the bathroom, closing the door behind him, Emmanuel felt a
hand touch his arm.
“What’s going on?” Luis was kneeling next to Emmanuel’s seat.
“Joseph kidnaped Elisha.” Emmanuel said, his expressions sober. “He has her
in his house.”
“Well call the police!” Luis said, looking around as though he wanted to run
to her, but knew it was not possible. “Do something!”
 Daniel Vega 101

“Calm down.” Emmanuel said, his eye brows forming a point on his brow.
Luis fell silent immediately. “We can’t call the cops, what are we going to tell
them? That I’m a psychic and I had a vision of someone being kidnaped?”
Luis squeezed passed Emmanuel and sat in David’s seat. He rested his head in
his hands as he leaned forward on the back of the chair in front of him. “I swear,
if he touches her, Ima kill him.”
“He isn’t going to do anything to her!” Emmanuel snapped. Luis realized that
he had been hurting more then he was allowing himself to show. “He took her
for a reason, one that has something to do with the work that has been going on.
For whatever reason he took her, he needs her alive.”
David came out of the bathroom, and walked over, waiting as Luis got out of
his seat before sitting down. His collar was soaked with sweat, and he began
coughing uncomfortably. Emmanuel looked over at him, noticing how his
behavior changed so suddenly.
“You’ve got to hold yourself together.” Emmanuel said, putting his hand on
David’s shoulder.
David quickly pushed Emmanuel’s hand off his shoulder, and looked up at
him.
“I’m fine.” He said, pausing for a moment. “Elisha is the only sister I have. If
anything happens to her, I swear I will make Joseph curse the day his parents
married and thought of having a son.”
“We will get her.” Emmanuel assured him. “Right now, we need to hold our-
selves together and think things out correctly.”
 8

“Could you be wrong about this?” June asked, looking through the window of
the Botanica. The lights were off, and the door was locked.
The four of them sat there silently, attempting to figure out a way to get to
Elisha. They had no idea what he had planned for her, Emmanuel knew he
wouldn’t harm her. But how to bring her to safety was the question, they all pon-
dered upon.
“Padrino,” Luis started. “Ima walk up to his house, kick the door in, and
knock him the fuck out!”
“I’m down with that.” June agreed.
“You’re Yawo!” Emmanuel snapped. “You need to be thinking on a level of
righteousness!”
“Sorry Padrino.” June apologized, returning to the window and looking out.
“I’ll be back.” David said, leaning on his Palo Muerto for support, as he
walked to the door.
“Where’re you going?” Emmanuel asked.
“I said I’ll be back!” David lashed out. He opened the door and walked out,
disappearing down the street.
“What’s his problem” Luis asked?
“He’s worried.” Emmanuel answered. “He’s always loved Elisha like a sister.
With him and me, it’s different. He sees me as a rival rather than a brother, but
he still has love for me. Elisha always supported him, no matter what, even when
I didn’t. Let him cool off, I’m sure he will be helpful once he’s calm.”

- 102 -
 Daniel Vega 103

Joseph ran down the stairs, approaching the front door, looking out the peep
hole.
“Padrino.” He said as he swung the door opened, ad invited him in.
“They’ve come back.” The American said, eyeing Joseph. “June has com-
pletely recovered from your attack.”
“How?” Joseph asked. “They didn’t dig my work up.”
“He was crowned, fool!” the American snapped out. “His crown is strong as
well. We need to find something else to keep them occupied until I’m ready.”
“You have anything in mind?” Joseph asked. “Anything I should do?”
“No.” The American answered, looking around the room. “I have to think
things through, figure out how to execute this plan. I need to gather my
thoughts, so I’m going to use your room, to relax and gather my thoughts.”
“By all means, Padrino.” Joseph said, walking up the stairs. “I was just prepar-
ing some things in there, but you can use it.”
“It’s okay.” The American said, as they reached the top of the stairs, he pro-
ceeded to the back room. “I’ll be fine in here.”
The American put his hand on the door handle, looking over his shoulder to
Joseph. He pushed open the door and walked in, closing the door behind him.
Grabbing the chair, seeming to be the only piece of furniture in this room, he sat
in it and relaxed his shoulders.
“There’s something seriously wrong here.” The American whispered to him-
self.
“Your eyes are closed Emmanuel.” The words formed in Emmanuel’s mind.
“You’re not seeing what you need to see, and you’re not remembering.”
Emmanuel looked around, seeing Eleggua materialized in the corner.
“What am I missing, father?” Emmanuel asked, Luis and June turning as the
silence was broken. “I’ve seen everything you have shown me, everything Oshun,
and Yemeya have shown.”
“Not everything needs to be given to you by us.” Eleggua said. “This is impor-
tant to your path, to your fate. You must figure this out on your own. We are
here, and we will help you, as best we can.”
“Remember that day.” The voice faded in, and disappeared. Emmanuel
looked around for the new presence, but it was gone.”
“What are they telling you?” Luis asked, speaking softly, unsure if he had been
interrupting a conversation that may have been taken place. “Did they tell you
anything about Elisha?”
104 The Palo Muerto

“She’s fine.” Eleggua answered. “She will come to no harm while this battle
continues. He needs her alive, but not as a tool against you. She’s a tool against
Joseph’s Padrino.”
“She’s okay.” Emmanuel relayed the message. “She’ll be fine as long as we are
at war with Joseph. He needs her alive, has something to do with him and his
Padrino. Seems they are at odds with one another.”
“A house divided!” Luis said, fires flicking in his eyes, as hope returned to him.
“You always told me that a house divide isn’t a strong house.”
“I’m glad you remember.” Emmanuel said, turning toward June. “What’s
wrong with you?”
“I’m frustrated!” June spat. “I feel as though there’s nothing I can do, yo. I feel
like my being here doesn’t change anything!”
“It changes everything!” Emmanuel assured him. “He attacked you first! He
tried to take you out for some reason, and you’re being here with me, is a slap to
his face. He’s fishing for some kind of leverage for something I have no clue to!
Don’t feel helpless, when the time comes, your involvement will be clear to you.”
Everyone sat in silence, hoping that the solution would dawn on them all.
Emmanuel looked down at his watch, noting that David still hadn’t return. An
hour now later, and he was still a no show.
“Luis.” Emmanuel broke the silence this time. “Take June home, have him
walk his Orisha in his house, and help him to set them up.”
“I’d rather be here with you.” Luis protested.
“Na, I ain’t going no where.” June agreed.
“I wasn’t requesting anything.” Emmanuel stated, his voice stern. “Take him
home, and help him set up his Orisha. Our hands are tied right now, and all of us
sitting around isn’t making a difference. We still have other obligations, so hop to
it.”
Luis jingled his keys in his hand, debating whether he would leave or not,
before Emmanuel shot him a stern look. He walked over to the door, and opened
it, looking over to June.
“Come on June.” Luis said, beckoning him to follow. “He’s right.”
June looked back and forth between the two of them, then rose to his feet. He
walked over to the many boxes he had carefully stacked on the center of the floor
of the shop. Luis walked over and begun helping him take them to the car, before
they pulled off.
“Remember that day.” Emmanuel said to himself, hoping the statement
would jog his memory. He walked over to the counter, looking down at the black
 Daniel Vega 105

cloth, which concealed the Palo of Eleggua, the negative aspect of Eleggua. He
had longed to see what that would be.
Walking around the counter, he picked it up, unwrapping it and laying it out
on the counter. He knew that the reason he never looked into this artifact was
fear. Fear of the power it possessed, and fears that it would be beyond his control.
He ran his hand over it, then lifted it in his hand, feeling the weight again.
Chimes drew his attention to the door, Emmanuel looked over to see David.
He appeared to be himself once again, his Palo in his hand, but he didn’t appear
to be leaning on it so heavily.
“What happened to you?” Emmanuel asked. “You just up and left, no reason,
nothing! What the fuck David, you bailing out on me when I need you the
most!”
“I’m sorry, Brother.” David said, his eyes locked on the floor. “There are
things happening with me that you’re not aware of. What I want to tell you isn’t
easy for me, and trust me when I say that time is working against me.”
Emmanuel leaned on the counter heavily. He heard people talk this way
before, always following the mention of death.
“Are you ill?” Emmanuel asked. “You got cancer or something, cause you
know I can help you. The Orisha can help you.”
“No.” David said. “I’m not a victim to some deadly disease. What I’m dealing
with is beyond that. Things will come to you soon, things that I know will shock
you. I just want to assure you that deep down inside of me, I truly love you,
brother. You and Elisha have been more of a family to me then anyone that ever
walked on this Earth. I wish that all my actions could have proven that to you.
“The power you’re up against, is a power that I have to admit, is beyond my
control. You will have to fight your enemy alone, but I assure you that I will be
there on that day. When you face them, I will be there, and my heart will want
you to succeed. The Palo of Eleggua, it is very powerful, and you will need it.”
Emmanuel noticed that David had begun sweating again, and as he spoke, it
seemed his strength begun to fail him. He leaned heavily against his Palo Muerto,
using it once again as a cane.
“You’re scaring me, David.” He said, prepared to lean forward if his brother
fell. “Can you explain in greater detail?”
David opened his mouth to speak, then closed it. He stopped sweating, and
stood straight up, his eyes seemed more narrow now. He looked up at Emman-
uel, a grin formed on his face.
“No.” He answered, then walked out the shop. Emmanuel walked over to the
door and looked out, but David was gone.
106 The Palo Muerto

Joseph walked through his yard, opening the door to the wooden shack. He
stepped in, and squatted in front of Elisha. He pulled the black cloth off her
head, and laid it on her lap. He smiled up at her, biting his lip as he did.
“You know, you’re very lucky that I need you as you are.” Joseph said, sliding
his thumb into her gag, and removing it from her mouth. “If you scream though,
I’ll beat you like a common thief.”
“Why are you doing this?” she asked, no fear in her voice. “Since when did
Santeros resort to violence?”
“Normally, I would have been a little more creative.” Joseph answered, tick-
ling her thigh with his finger. “You little witches proved to be a little more
resourceful then I thought. I’m glad things turned out the way they did, since
you revealed my doom to me.”
“I don’t understand how I ever fit in your plot.” Elisha’s sarcasm brought a
smile to his face.
“That was the beauty of everything.” Joseph said. “Padrino told me that it was
very important you don’t learn his identity. That’s where I fit in. That’s why I
was attacking you all directly, while he sat on the sideline. The entire time, you
all have been so focused on me, that your greatest enemy has been able to dance
around you, undetected.”
“Is that supposed to be some new information?” she laughed. “We all knew
that you had someone with you! You made that clear to Emmanuel.”
“That’s where you come in.” He interrupted. “Once we succeed in killing all
of you, catering to his ego, he will surely try to kill me. So you’re my little trump
card.”
“You’re dumber then I thought!” she laughed. “You’re gonna threaten my life,
so he doesn’t kill you! Hello, you both have been trying to kill us since I came
back to the States!”
“We never attacked you.” Joseph said. “The truth is, I think he loves you.
How often he warned me to bring you no harm. He has plans for you, after he
takes care of me.”
“How does he know me?” She asked. “I don’t know any perverted Santeros.”
Joseph laughed and fell back, clapping his hands together.
“Padrino is crafty.” Joseph said, controlling his laughter. “If the world is a
stage then he played his part, and played you fools most of all!”

Emmanuel stood before his simple altar in the Botanica. He had the Palo of
Eleggua laid out on the table in front of him, a rooster in his hand. Eleggua stood
 Daniel Vega 107

behind him, silently, providing no encouragement, nor discouraging. Emmanuel

looked off to the side and gave the small child a look. He received a simple nod,
when he knelt down and lifted his knife.
He began speaking in Lucumi, calling to his father in his native tongue. Tak-
ing the knife, he beheaded the rooster, holding it over the Palo of Eleggua, the
blood falling down over it. He could feel energy filling the room. The hair on the
back of his neck rose on end, anger welling up inside of him.
“Your enemy is my enemy.” The words came to his mind. The power made
him feel dizzy. “Those that stand before you, also stand before me!”
Emmanuel lost all control of his sight. Looking around the room, he could see
waves of light emitting from the Palo of Eleggua. They pulsed from the staff, as
though it was a heart beat. Light seemed to seep out of the walls, and from under
his feet. He could hear his heart pounding in his chest, feel the air entering his
lung as if it was a solid object.
“Don’t fight me!” the voice was welcoming, familiar, yet like nothing he could
recall. “Embrace me. We are one, and one hundred and one!”
All the energy seemed to shift, as though the Palo of Eleggua had become a
vacuum, sucking into it. Emmanuel fell to his knee, feeling his own energy pour-
ing out of his own body and into the staff. He reached out, hoping to stop it
before it drained him completely.
“Don’t fight me!” the words were commanding. He could see Eleggua in the
corner, watching with no fear, no signs of urgency. “Embrace me.”
Emmanuel felt the energy change in the room again, this time, it seemed to
flow out of the Palo of Eleggua, and into Emmanuel. The weakness he felt begun
to fade, warmth spread across his body, he felt himself growing strong. Every-
thing began to make sense, looking down at the Palo, seeing waves of energy
pouring into him. He reached out and picked it up, its touch was like a charge in
his hand.
“Now we are ready!” the voice said, then faded away, leaving Emmanuel
alone.

The American walked into Joseph’s house, slamming the door hard as he did.
“Joseph!” his voice seemed to vibrate off every wall with force.
It only took a moment for Joseph to run in the room from the kitchen, look-
ing startled from the sudden intrusion.
“Padrino!” he said, stopping a few feet short of him. “What’s wrong?”
“What are you up too?” the American asked. “What are you attempting to
hide from me?”
108 The Palo Muerto

“Padrino!” Joseph fell to his knees. “I would never hide anything from you.
Why would you say such things?”
“You know if you’re lying to me, I will have no mercy on you!” the American
said, gripping his Palo Muerto tightly. “I would bring horrors into your life! I
would make you suffer the pain your father felt when he burned in your house. I
will make you relive that moment, over and over, your dead mother throwing
herself in the fire after him. Don’t dare hold yourself above me. I will knock you
off your pedestal!”
“I assure you,” Joseph said, crawling toward the American and taking his
hand. “I hide nothing, you need only read me. If I have done something to wrong
you, it has never been my intention, just correct me so I may learn.”
“Don’t try me, Joseph.” The American said, pulling his hand away from
Joseph. “Your life means nothing to me if we fail. I have waited more than two
decades for this day, and we are so close. Failure is not an option! Know this, if
we fail, you’re after life will be servitude for me, and my children to come. You
will never find peace, you will never travel back to Ile Ifa, you will be trapped!”
“He’s growing weak.” The words came to Joseph’s mind, a voice he never
heard before. “When the time comes, follow my instructions. You and I will do
great things together!”
“Who is this?” Joseph projected his thoughts out.
“You know me well. We once shared the same home, the same family, the
same pleasures in life. If you look deep inside, you will see that it has always been
I, that has moved everything in your life. Look back and within all the events that
have transpired in your life, Joseph. You will see.”
Joseph’s eyes opened wide, the room seemed to spin, and he remembered.
“Father?”

23 years ago
Joseph sat on the steps to his house, awaiting his mother to come out. He looked
around at the villagers going about their daily tasks. The children that ran about
looked at him, but he could feel that their thoughts and emotions toward him
were that of fear.
“Come on honey.” His mother said, emerging from the house, and taking him
by the hand. “We have to go.”
“Wait.” A tall dark man said, coming after her from the house. “Where do you
think you are taking my son? If you wish to dishonor this family, you will do it
without bringing any more shame upon my son! He stays here with me. All I
have, and all I learned will be his. You could never take him as far as I intent too.”
 Daniel Vega 109

Fear sunk into the pit of the woman’s stomach, though she wanted to release
the child and escape her husband’s anger, she grabbed him tight.
“Do you see that it is you that bring shame upon us?” she shouted at him.
“You were once a great and respected priest, now everyone looks at you as though
you are the cause of all the problems of the village. If you continue to meddle in
these powers, Armon, then you will even lose the Love I have for you.
“And now you tell me that you plan the same thing for my son? It was I that
birth him, my body that he came from. I would rather die then see him in your
hands, as long as you continue to use your gift for your evil purposes.”
“I will step over your carcass to get to my boy!” Armon promised, stepping
closer to the two. “If you would like to find out how far I’m prepared to go, all
you need to do is turn around and attempt to leave.”
“Armon. Racheal.” The greeting came from behind them. She turned to see
the local priest, head of their tribe, standing there with several other Yawo’s. “We
worry about you, Armon. I wish that I could say we are here for more social pur-
poses, but that is the farthest thing from the truth. Everyone is growing suspi-
cious of your behavior. You’re involvement in the disappearances of several of our
brothers.”
“Who are you to judge me?” Armon snapped. “Do you think that you are in a
position to bring judgement upon me? Do you really believe that you are the
messenger of the Orisha come to punish me for my deeds? You fools couldn’t
phantom the power I’ve come across.”
“We didn’t come to fight you, Armon.” The priest said, a smile spreading
across his face, his posture showed his confidence. “We’ve come to give you a
choice. You can leave before night fall, and your name would forever be erased
from our tribe, or you can stay. Staying will result in your death.”
“Then when you come tonight,” Armon began. “I will have a special place for
your souls!”
The priest stared up at Armon, the Yawos kept their heads low to the ground,
too afraid to be noticed by him. Joseph’s mother grabbed the priests are as he
turned, and stopped him.
“Please, wait.” She begged, the priest stopped to face her. “Forgive him. He’s
lost to his own gift. Help me to change him back to the man that I once loved.”
Armon looked down at his wife and spat. She could feel his anger toward her,
and for a moment, she feared for her life. He turned and entered the house, slam-
ming the door behind him.
“Our hearts truly go out to you, Racheal.” The priest said, signing. “I know he
is your husband, and I know that you love him. We all did at one time, when he
110 The Palo Muerto

was faithful to us all. He’s falling from the grace of the Orisha, and his dark
power grows stronger every day. We have reason to believe that he was responsi-
ble for the murder of Kato.”
Racheal brought her hand to her mouth, gasping at the sudden news. She
looked down to her son, and brought him closer to her.
“He was my son’s age!” she said.
“He’s spilled the blood of the innocent to farther strengthen his power.” The
priest explained. “Several people have turned up missing, all last seen with your
husband, we can’t have this kind of chaos in our home.”
“What’s to become of me and my son?” she asked. “What are we to do?”
“You have a place here still.” The priest said. “We know that his power hasn’t
tainted you, but for how long you will prevail against him is beyond us. Tonight
we will act. I hope when that happens that you will not be at his side.”
She walked across the village, following a trail which leads out of the village
and into the woods. Racheal was no fool, being married to a Santero had taught
her how to survive, and what power to turn to under every circumstance. She fell
on her face, tears moistening the soil, and making it stick to her face.
Joseph stared at his mother, wondering what it was she thought would happen
by crawling through the dirt. He loved his mother, but felt a disgust for her, her
display of weakness. He was young, soon to become four years old, but he was
connected to the Orisha. He was beyond his years.
He sat in the dirt, looking up at the skin, watching as the sky shifting from
day to night. How long they sat there, both in their own thoughts, when smoke
begun to form in the distance.
“Mom,” Joseph stated, patting his mother on the shoulder. “It’s already
begun.”
She lifted her head and looked toward the village, knowing instantly that her
husband was in danger.
“Do I hide?” she asked herself. “Do I allow this to happen? He’s grown so evil,
but deep down inside, he is the man I fell in love with. I know he can be reached!
No one that has done the great and wonderful things, which he did, can become
so rotten to the core.”
She rose to her feet, looking back at her son, then ran toward the smoke.
Joseph watched his mother running, aware that her attention was to leave him
behind, rising to his feet, he began to run behind her.
As he followed, his mother darted into their house. The entire village watched
the house as it burned. No one attempted to stop Racheal, but allowed her to run
 Daniel Vega 111

in. As Joseph chased after her, he could feel everyone’s emotions, hear their
thoughts in his own mind.
“Let them all die!” the thoughts came from a woman that had been watching
from a distance. “Good, let all evidence fade away with him.” The thoughts came
from a man sitting down, and smiling at the fire.
Joseph ran in the house, seeing his mother running straight to her husband
who had been laying on the kitchen floor. He appeared to be unconscious, but as
she knelt down beside him and begun to shake him, he looked up.
“Racheal!” the urgency in his voice was there, though the energy to carry his
voice wasn’t “I can’t move. They shot me with darts. Take the boy and run.”
“You’re my husband!” she cried. “I promised that I would never leave your
side! If you die, then I die with you.”
Joseph felt something over his shoulder, then seen his mother become stiff,
and fall to the floor. He turned and seen a man with a blow dart in his hand,
loading another one in it. He turned back to his mother and seen that she had a
poisoned needle in her neck.
“Not while I live!” Armon shouted, using the last of his energy to outstretch
his hand to the man preparing to dart his son.
Armon summoned all the knowledge, all the power that he acquired from the
dark arts, and directed his energy at the men. He watched as he froze with the
blow dark just to his lips, and begun to gasp for air. His hair turned instantly
grey, and his body rose from the ground and flew back.
Two other men ran into the door way, thick clubs in their hands. He looked
at his son, and outstretched his had to him. Joseph shot backwards out the house,
as though an unseen force had hit him in the chest.
Joseph rubbed at his chest, and gasped for air. Nothing was there, but he was
sure that something hit him hard, knocking him out the house. He looked up,
seeing his father in the house, and the two men approaching with their clubs in
hand. Armon held his hand to the ceiling, when the entire house came down on
them all.
“Dad!” Joseph cried out. “Mom!”

“I remember!” Joseph said, his Padrino turned as though he had been

addressed.
“What did you say?” the American asked.
“Nothing, Padrino.” Joseph said, looking at the Palo Muerto in his Padrino’s
hand.
112 The Palo Muerto

“All this time,” Joseph thought to himself. “He’s been using my father’s
power! He isn’t that strong. My father is doing all those great things through
him. He must have found my fathers grave.”
“He did, and now you know.” Armon answered, appearing to Joseph. “He
will fall before his enemy, and when that happens, you must take hold of my Palo
Muerto. It has always been I that have been watching you, waiting for the day we
can reunite.”
 9

Luis and June walked into the Botanica, stopping and looking Emmanuel over,
as he stood by the window. His expression was sober, seeming as though he
found a solution to their problems, feeling a new energy in the shop, Luis stated,
“Something seems different.”
“It’s funny how everything can change in an instant.” Emmanuel said, walk-
ing across the shop to the counter with his hands cupped together behind his
back. “I was so stupid! They gave me everything I needed to understand what was
going on, everything, and yet I couldn’t see.”
“What’re you talking bout?” June asked, shocked that the man he idolized so
much, failed to see something at the time he needed to.
“Jacob has been warning me through the grave.” Emmanuel started, noticing
Luis about to interrupt him, he continued, to prevent him. “He kept telling me
to remember that night, but it didn’t make senses to me. After June was hit, I was
so consumed in getting him on his feet that I didn’t look around at who was with
me.”
“Whatcha mean? Who was with you?” Luis asked. “It’s always been us.”
“And David.” Emmanuel added, a grin on his face, though his brows were
low. “He danced around us, parading the very thing I thought was destroyed in
Africa 21 years ago. My love for him kept me from investigating him as a possi-
bility.
“Don’t you think it’s strange that when I touch him, he pushes me away?
Don’t you think it’s odd that he keeps his Palo Muerto with him at all times?

- 113 -
114 The Palo Muerto

Don’t you think it’s strange that when you look at it, he hides it? There’s nothing
strange about it when you see it for what it really is.”
“I’m lost, Padrino.” Luis admitted. “What is it?”
“During David’s ceremony 21 years ago,” Emmanuel began. “He ventured
into a part of the burial site, where an evil Santero had been buried. He concealed
the dirt from the grave and reached out to this Muerto, and tricked everyone into
making a Palo with him. God, that guy was so strong that he nearly killed the
priest that crowned us, but Eleggua had different plans, and used me to stop him.
“A new Palo Muerto was made for David, and the old one was to be
destroyed, but somehow, he switched them. My god brother is being controlled
by a spirit known as Armon! I should have seen it even then, but I was so naive!”
“You fought Muertos before, Padrino.” Luis said, walking over and putting
his hand on Emmanuel’s shoulder. “This just means we’ll fight one more.”
“You don’t understand the entire story.” Emmanuel explained. “Armon was
murdered for his evil practices. He murdered men, woman, and children to fur-
ther obtain power in his dark arts. The day he came down and I faced him, I saw
his story, but never told a soul. Though he died in that fire, along with his wife,
Racheal, his son survived! This child was strong, gifted, and bonded to his father.
“After Armon’s death, his young son continued on his father’s path, but with
good intentions, he wanted to help people, however, Armon found a way to
reunite with his son, and used David to get him away from everyone that could
stop him. Not only train him, but bring him here, to the states, where he can be
free to grow stronger then we could ever imagine.
“There’s one small problem though. I stopped him 21 years ago, and he’s still
angry for that. If he is to succeed, I must be removed from the picture. So he took
away the people that I relied on, Jacob, he tried June, and I’m sure you were next
Luis. Once I was alone, then he would have revealed himself to me, catching me
off guard. He’s got one card on me though. He knows I won’t kill my god
brother.”
“Shit, that doesn’t mean that I can’t!” Luis said, walking toward the window.
“I will break that pussy in two! Hold up, so what you mean that David has Elisha
kidnaped?”
“That’s the funny thing.” Emmanuel answered. “David had no knowledge of
that. On the plane, it unsettled him, and I know it was Joseph that took her.
Armon’s son’s name is Joseph!”
“Wow!” June said. “What the fuck kind of shit is that! So we’re up against
father and son. Why would Joseph kidnap Elisha without David knowing? Does
Armon know what Joseph does?”
 Daniel Vega 115

“Yeah.” Luis answered. “You can’t hide anything from a Muerto. The ques-
tion is, why doesn’t David know?”
“Because, if Armon is to use David to reunite him with his son,” Emmanuel
explained. “Then David has to be removed from the picture. His Palo Muerto
has to be passed on. You can’t just hand it over to someone else. As long as David
is alive, then Armon can’t work through Joseph the way he wants.”
“Well, Armon can speak to Joseph.” Luis added. “It’s possible that he’s been
communicating with both of them, working both of them to his advantage.”
“I don’t think so.” Emmanuel shook his head. “When you saw Joseph in this
shop, he respected David, he believed that he was strong enough to face me. In
the vision, I saw fear in Joseph, so he truly doesn’t know.”
“So where does Elisha fit in with all this?” June asked. “I mean that he wanted
everyone out the way. Why didn’t he try and take her out the way?”
“I won’t pretend to know the answer to that.” Emmanuel answered. “The fact
of the matter is, that’s exactly what I been trying to figure out here myself. If I
knew where she fit in, I would understand what needs to be done.”
“What does Eleggua have to say about all this?” Luis asked. “Did you talk to
him?”
“Well he said that I need to work through this, but he’s with me.” Emmanuel
answers. “It’s one of those fate things.”
“Shit!” Luis said, walking back over to the window. “So what do we do now?”
“I know everything will reveal itself.” Emmanuel answered. “But there’s a new
player on the field.”
Emmanuel lifted the Palo of Eleggua, and held it out for them to see. Luis
identified the energy. It was present when he first walked into the shop. He felt a
fear and power well inside of him.
“What can you do with it?” Luis asked. “What purpose does it serve?”
“You can use it for everything!” Emmanuel said with a smile. “But the power
in it is great, stronger then any Palo I ever encountered in my life. If Armon tries
to manifest himself through that Palo Muerto, rest assure that I will use this to
push him to the other side.”

David rested his Palo Muerto on Joseph’s Alter. He knelt down, silently com-
municating with Armon, before taking the rooster from Joseph’s hand and whis-
pering silently. Taking hold of a bottle of rum, he poured some in his mouth,
spraying it onto the rooster.
“Tonight we engaged our enemy!” David said, shaking the rooster in anger.
“Tonight everyone will fall, that stand before us!”
116 The Palo Muerto

He stabbed the rooster in the neck, bleeding down onto the Palo Muerto. He
could feel Armon’s satisfaction from the offering, feeling his strength growing
inside. He threw the body of the rooster on the floor and took the Palo Muerto in
his hand.
“Shouldn’t you allow him to feed?” Joseph asked. “Doesn’t he need three days
to rest before using him?”
“This is not your average Palo Muerto.” David Explained. “You would be wise
to not question me, and know that I know what I’m doing.”
“Forgive me Padrino.” Joseph humbled himself. “I only seek to learn from
you.”
“And you have.” David replied. “You have learned a great deal from me, and
you will learn much more. Be patient, and all the mysteries we carry will be
passed to you.”
“May I ask a question?” Joseph asked.
“Ask.”
“When and where do we attack?” he asked.
“Tonight, at the Botanica!”

“I know we’re not going to wait here all damn night!” Luis protested. Emman-
uel had been pacing the shop for over an hour now, without so much as a word.
“These psychos have your sister, and you’re pacing. We know where they are,
where she is, and who we’re up against. Let’s just go over there!”
“What do you want to do?” Emmanuel snapped. “Kick in their door, come in
blazing guns? That’s my god sister, and she won’t be hurt as long as we remain
cool. We wait for now.
“We need to have faith. One thing you continue to forget is that she is a
Santera! She’s very well capable of taking care of herself, so we need to keep our
focus on the big picture, and not her current condition.”
“Let’s get out of here then!” June said, turning from the window. “I mean, sit-
ting here is just making everything more difficult. Maybe if we left here, and went
somewhere else, put our minds on something else, the answer will come to us.”
Luis and Emmanuel looked at each other, then to June. Luis smiled and
looked at Emmanuel.
“Damn, he learns fast.” He said laughing, and tapping Emmanuel’s shoulder.
“I say a pizza.”
“Na, a cheese steak!” June said, smiling back to them. “I ain’t had one in
weeks.”
 Daniel Vega 117

“Get the gates to the windows.” Emmanuel instructed Luis. “I’ma get the
keys, and we out. Maybe we can see shit clearer with a full stomach.”
The lights turned out as Luis lowered the gates to the window of the shop.
June leaned on the car just in front of the shop, watching as Emmanuel stepped
out, turned around and locked the door. Aiite, let’s…”
Luis looked at Emmanuel as he stood fixated on something across the street,
his hands now clenching his Palo of Eleggua tightly.
“Leaving before the party even starts?” It was David, walking across the street
toward them without any fear. “I thought you would have spent the night in
there.”
“Where’s Elisha?” Luis asked, advancing toward David, before Emmanuel
stopped him.
“You almost had me believe that Joseph kidnaped her.” David said. “I won’t
lie. It knocked me off my game.”
“We’re not lying to you, David.” Emmanuel explained. “There are things hap-
pening around you that you don’t even know. You have been played by your own
god son.”
“Joseph understands his place with me.” David smiled. “Besides, I was at the
house and she isn’t there.”
“Well tell me why Joseph isn’t here with you then.” Emmanuel asked. “I’m
sure if you came to finish your work, you’re going to need him. You left him
behind to keep an eye on her.”
“Enough with the lies!” David’s voice distorted, giving off two voices at one
time.
“You came here to finish it.” Emmanuel said, walking toward David, and
holding out his Palo of Eleggua. “Then let’s finish it. June. Luis. Under no cir-
cumstance are you to interfere.”
Emmanuel’s godsons back up, looking at the two. Both seemed angered and
ready kill. David had his Palo Muerto in his hand, blood dripping off of it.
Emmanuel carried his Palo of Eleggua in his hand. Surely, they knew that this
would be one hell of a battle.
David began chanting in Lucumi, and pounding his Palo Muerto against the
ground. Emmanuel began tracing a symbol in the air with his finger, while chant-
ing on his own. Luis and June could only watch from the side. Emmanuel now
tracing a circle on the ground with his foot around him, David stopped, pounded
his Palo Muerto on the ground, and pointed it at Emmanuel.
The winds seemed to howl, dark clouds seemed to spread across the clear
night sky. It was as before, winds racing around Emmanuel with tremendous
118 The Palo Muerto

force. June and Luis, ran back to prevent themselves from getting caught in his
evil power. Emmanuel didn’t seem to move, or was even affected by it.
Emmanuel stood straight up, looking at David. His concentration intensified,
and he felt himself slipping away. They made eye contact, and as Emmanuel had
planned, he slipped into David’s mind.
He felt three presences within David. One was his childhood god brother.
The other was that of Armon. He was surprised to see that they were both prison-
ers within one body. David and Armon’s consciousness had created an entirely
new presence, an entire new ego which had been dominating both of them.
Armon’s anger and hatred for what had happened, and his lust to continue his
work was strong in this newly created presence. David’s jealousy and emotion
toward Emmanuel. The combined knowledge of the two gave it all it needed to
create this plan, and execute it. What Emmanuel found interesting was that, they
both wanted to be free from each other.
“Why is he not affected?” David asked himself, watching as Emmanuel stood
steadfast, without even attempting to strike back. “What is he doing?”
Emmanuel pulled his mind back, and brought his foot against the ground.
“Spirit I command you in the name of Eleggua!” Emmanuel begun, watching
as David’s facial expression changed from anger to pure horror. “I command you
in the name of all the Orisha to depart from this plan, and return to the light.
Chango, I call upon you to burn away the obstacles set before me by my enemy.
Oya, come forth and carry this spirit home!”
“He’s attempting to elevate Armon!” Joseph whispered to himself, clenching
onto Elisha with a knife to her throat. Her hands were still bound and the black
mask over her head. He stepped out of the shadows, and slowly made his way
into the street.
Emmanuel’s concentration was broken, as he saw Joseph approaching, his god
sister in clear danger. David buckled to a knee, leaning heavily onto his Palo
Muerto. For a moment, Emmanuel could see Armon’s spirit slip back into
David’s body, realizing the elevation had been working. David panted, looking
over his shoulder, he could see what had stopped Emmanuel from continuing.
“Joseph!” David protested, attempting to rise to his feet. “Let her go!”
“Now is the time!” Armon’s voice formed in Joseph’s mind. “Now is the time
to finish him off!”
“I still need you.” Joseph said, knocking Elisha on the head. As she fell to the
ground, he stomped his foot and a woman materialized before him.
June felt fears grip him for a moment, as he recognized the grey skin woman
that had attacked him in his room appear in front of Joseph. It seemed to charge
 Daniel Vega 119

in David’s direction, that screeching sound reminding him that it was almost the
last sound he heard.
David, while still on one knee, outstretched his hand toward the Muerto, and
tapped the Palo Muerto to the ground. It stopped, looking down at him.
“Fool!” David snapped. “It was I that brought this Muerto down for you. Did
you believe I would have allowed you to have the power to use it against me?”
“I learned all I know from you, Padrino!” Joseph smiled. “Your greatest lesson
was that things are not always as they appear.”
Joseph stomped his foot, and the Muerto charged forward, it’s appearance
changing, stepping through its former appearance as though it were smoke. Now
it was a man charging at David. The screeching now hellish growls. Its skin was
pale. Eyes were white, purple veins pulsing from its skin.
David’s air escaped him as the Muerto pushed its hand into his chest, turning
it. It lowered its head face to face with his. Death was on its breath, cold quickly
spreading throughout David’s body. Emmanuel stepped back in fear as he saw
the impossible happen.
Pulling his hand out of David’s chest, the Muerto ripped out David’s soul!
Paralyzed, David looked up at his very soul as the Muerto begun to rise into the
air, vanishing into the after life. David exhaled, and his eyes rolled to the back of
his head, then his body fell lifeless on the ground.
“David!” Emmanuel whispered his name, tears forming in his eyes. He looked
up at Joseph, pure hatred in his eyes. Joseph knelt down, lifting Elisha to her feet.
“NO!”
“Don’t even try to pull any of your stunts, Emmanuel.” Joseph said, forcing
Elisha to walk with him. “My fight isn’t with you, and I would like it if it didn’t
continue any longer. For years I was as a slave to this man, forced to do great acts
of evil or suffer the consequences. You and I both know that we all get back what
we put into this world. David had it coming.”
“I could have saved him!” Emmanuel spat through his teeth. “If you hadn’t
come, I could have freed him from Armon’s influence!”
“That’s exactly the thing I wanted to stop!” Joseph laughed. “For years I
thought David had possessed this great power, until my father spoke to me, and I
realized he had been working through your god brother. I’m Armon’s son, and he
belongs with me! My father’s knowledge, his power, it was all meant to be passed
down to me, before he was killed by meddling people like yourself.”
As Joseph stood a foot away from the Palo Muerto of Armon, he pushed
Elisha toward Emmanuel, bent down and grabbed the Palo. Emmanuel begun to
120 The Palo Muerto

charge when Joseph tapped the Palo Muerto of Armon to the ground and
appeared to run away, in three different directions at once.
Luis and June stood stunned, as they saw three different Josephs running in
three different directions.
“Padrino!” Luis shouted. “Which one do we go after?”
“None!” Emmanuel said, kneeling next to Elisha, and taking the sack off her
head. “Are you okay?”
“I’m fine now that I see you.” Elisha said, pushing herself up after Emmanuel
untied her rope. “He thought David would kill him after his fight with you was
over. The real side of David loved enough to speak of me, even through Armon’s
corruption.”
Her tears streamed down her cheeks as she looked down at David. Emmanuel
failed his attempt to hold back his tears, pulling her close to him, he tightened his
hold on her.
 10

Business seemed back to normal again. June stood behind the register, Luis
stepped out of the back room, giving a man instructions on how to complete his
cleansing with a bath. Emmanuel stood by the window, looking outside. June
nodded in his direction, realizing that he did nothing all day but stood there. For
two weeks now, this is how he’s been, mourning the death of his beloved god
brother.
The customer paid June for his supplies, and the cleansing that Luis had per-
formed. After walking out, June shook his head looking over to Luis.
“Padrino.” June, drew his attention away from his thoughts. “Why are you
doing this?”
“Doing what, June?” Emmanuel asked, staring back with puffy red eyes.
“I understand that you lost someone close to you yo, but is it really necessary
to act like this?” June paused for a minute, biting his lip then shaking his head.
“You brought me to this religion, telling me that Chris was in a better place. That
to die is when someone complete all the lessons they were sent here to learn. That
comforted me, giving me the strength to go on yo. You said that in time I will be
able to see him again.
“Well, let me tell you that same advice, Padrino. You will see him again. You
can’t be selfish knowing what you know. He has completed his journey, and now
it’s time to return to yours.”
Emmanuel bit his lip. He was angry that someone was attempting to tell him
how he should be feeling, knowing that he lost someone dear to him, yet he knew

- 121 -
122 The Palo Muerto

that June was right. Mourning in this fashion was hypocritical, and the fact was
that he was being selfish.
He felt wronged because he failed to save David. He felt wronged because he
wanted more time with him. Emmanuel was aware that the journey of life is
never as we wanted it to be, but what it has to be.
“I’m sorry.” Emmanuel apologized. “You’re right, 100%. I wanted more time
with him, and at his last moment I was prepared to save him.”
“Well, it’s like you said, Padrino,” Luis begun. “You only fail when you don’t
learn from your mistake. If you want to mourn like that, then go ahead, but
when you’re finished mourning, we have to figure out what we’re gonna do about
Joseph.”
“He’s got Armon.” June added. “He played all of us. What’s gonna happen if
he’s allowed to keep that Palo Muerto?”
“That’s the question you should be asking yourself, Emmanuel.” Eleggua’s
word cut into his thoughts, as he materialized in front of him. “What could really
happen if he’s allowed to continue in his fathers’ footsteps? In life, Armon was
dangerous, in death he is that much more dangerous.
“With Joseph’s vessel and gift, it’s a matter of time before he begins to teach
other his dark arts. There is a greater evil working beyond the eyes of man, the
same evil that consumed Armon. Now it’s being passed to his son, and should he
succeed, there will be no measuring the damage he could bring to this world. Can
you live with that Emmanuel?”
“No.” Emmanuel answered. “I can’t. He has to be stopped, and his secrets
buried along with him. I will finish what started in Africa 21 years ago, and ele-
vate Armon forever. His Palo will be destroyed by my hand.”
“That’s the spirit.” Eleggua smiled.
“Man. We don’t even know how to find him.” June said. “I doubt that he’s
still living in that house.”
“It’s a hell of a good place to start looking at though.” Said Luis. “He might
have left something behind that could tell us where he was planning on going
next.”
“All we need to hope for is that he said something about where he was going.”
Emmanuel smiled. “If I touch something in there that he was holding when he
spoke, I’ll know exactly where he’s going.”
“Damn, I wish I could do work!” June found himself wishing this often,
though he was well aware that he was far away from completing his year as Yawo.
“And I don’t even know what I’ma do if I don’t get some ass!”
 Daniel Vega 123

Emmanuel and Luis laughed, looking at the frustrated young man. His
expression was innocent, though his words spoke true.
“I remember my time as Yawo.” Luis said, smiling. “That rule was probably
the hardest to follow, but I did.”
“If you keep your mind on the Orisha, and not on booty, you’ll find that you
won’t be so frustrated.” Said Emmanuel. “I know you’re human, and that desire
is the hardest to resist, but that’s only if you allow it.”
“Well I still wanna do work.” June protested. “I know all the stuff about
building a relationship with the Orisha, and I have, but I wanna help out with
this.”
“Don’t rush to do work.” Emmanuel shook his head at him. “When you’re
ready, you’ll have so much work to do, you’re going to wish you could just lay
back and relax. The only thing I can’t teach you, is how to be patient, but it’s the
biggest lesson you need to learn right now.”

Joseph picked up the Palo Muerto of Armon. The blood which had ran down
it, was now dry, having rested for the necessary three days, Joseph was ready to
bring down his father. He looked it up and down, realizing that this piece of
wood, had held the essence of his father for so long, and now it was in his own
hands. Smiling, he closes his eyes, facing his alter in his basement.
The bottom of the Palo Muerto came against the basement floor hard, shatter-
ing the silence. Joseph’s eyes were closed as he concentrated on his father. He
spoke his name, as he felt his arm crashing the Palo down again, cold chills
sweeping up and down his neck, he knew he could feel his father approaching.
After the third time the Palo came down, Joseph felt himself lose control of his
arm, and with great intensity and speed, the Palo Muerto in his hand beat the
ground.
Looking straight ahead of him, Joseph could see Armon appear. His tears
welled in his eyes, as his father’s lips parted to form a smile. Armon approached,
his hands out as though to embrace his son, when he vanished, and a light came
down upon Joseph.
“You must see what I have.” Armon’s words formed in Joseph’s mind. “I must
show you what I have done, so you may now where we are going! You must know
me, to know my cause.”

23 years ago
Armon sat in his home in Africa. His wife slept silently in her bed, as he knelt
before his Orisha. Looking over his Soperas, he could feel his spirit stirring inside
124 The Palo Muerto

of him. He could feel his senses of accomplishment, helping his village to prosper
so, even bring the faith back into so many hearts. How he followed in the steps of
his ancestors, and they were all great and remembered.
He could hear his son crying in the other room of his home flat. He rose to his
feet, and walked into the other room. His son, covered in sweat, seeming to be
fighting something in his dream. Lifting him up, Armon cradled him in his arms.
“You don’t have to cry, Joseph, dad is here.” He whispered as he rocked his
son back and forth. His son opened his eyes and looked straight up at him.
“You’re okay now, my son. Go back to sleep.”
“Papa, why are you going away?” Joseph asked, his tears forming in his eyes.
“I’m not going anywhere, Joseph.” Armon smiled down as he comforted his
son. “If I do go anywhere, I’ll be sure that you come with me. You’re my son, and
we will be together as long as life permits.”
Joseph closed his eyes, and fell back asleep. Armon laid him back in his bed.
He rose to his feet, and walked outside, grabbing his Palo Muerto as he did. After
stepping out into the cool night air, he made his way straight to a hut across the
village, tapping his Palo against the wooden frame.
A head poked out of the tent, then a hand held it parted opened for Armon to
enter. He stooped down and walked in, sitting down on the floor, several other
people there. The man that invited him in, reached under a small wooden table
and pulled out a book, wrapped in some kind of animal skin.
“Were you able to make anything out?” Armon asked. “Have you learned any-
thing new from it?”
“No.” The man said, holding the book out to Armon. “One translation states
that the art will only reveal itself to the one it chooses. I tried to make out the cer-
emonies on my own, but no matter how hard I try, it eludes me.”
Armon opened the book, and flipped through the pages, reading it with ease.
He stopped when he came to one of the ceremonies. He fingered through it, his
eyes widening, licking his lips, he looked up to the others.
“This is Taboo!” he said, looking to the others. “This ceremony is describing a
human sacrifice. The blood of the innocents will open the way too true power.”
He fingered through the passage. “It’s saying how it can benefit whoever makes
the sacrifice. It explains how it can open up new powers within the human soul.
Even give man the power to control objects with thought.”
“But at such a cost!” one of the men said, shaking his head. “Such power could
help us to prosper. We could defend ourselves against the raids, and even expand,
but who would offer up the blood of an innocent.”
 Daniel Vega 125

“On our next raid, we will capture one of them.” Armon looked over at the
priest, leaning forward, the light revealing his identity. “If we can manage to cap-
ture one, then we can explore this avenue.”
“That wouldn’t work.” Armon said, feeling his heart leap in his chest. “It
requires the sacrifice of a child.”

Armon stumbled in his house, blood covered his body, his face stained from
his tears. He knelt there, sobbing, then shot to his feet and ran into his room. He
threw himself on the floor in front of his Orisha, and began ripping his clothes
from his body.
“Forgive me!” he cried, his wife sitting up in bed, staring down at him. “I only
wanted to make us all better, I had no idea!”
“Armon!” she said, crawling out of bed, and sinking down to the floor beside
her husband. “Whose blood is this on you? What happened?”
“I’ve done something unthinkable!” he cried. “I only wanted to make things
better.”
“Armon, you’re scaring me!” she touched his shoulder, he recoiled for a
moment, then turned and embraced her.
“Please tell me that you will always love me!” he cried in her ear. “Please tell
me you will always remember me as the man you married.”
“Armon, you’re my husband.” She said, wrapping her arms around him, and
kissing him on his neck. “I promised to always love you, and I will.”

Night fell again over the village, and just as before, Armon found himself in
another secret meeting. This time, there was someone standing outside the tent.
The priest held out a stone in his hand, facing Armon, a smile stretched out
across his face.
“Do it, Armon.” He said.
Armon looked at the stone in the priest’s hand, and with a thought, it lifted
out of his hand and slowly drifted through the air over to him. He lifted his own
hand and took hold of it, looking to the others.
“This is amazing!” one of the men proclaimed, looking to the others. “The
things we could do for our village! We could prosper, we could defend ourselves
in a way that was never possible before.”
“How far have you pushed yourself with this new ability?” the priest asked,
looking to Armon. “Can you move anything? Bigger objects, with what speed?”
126 The Palo Muerto

“I don’t know.” Armon admitted. “But I should warn you all. I feel myself
changing. I want to do more. I find myself willing to go to any lengths to further
this power, but I feel in my soul that I have lost touched with the Orisha.
“These new ceremonies, these new powers we are exploring, seem to be chang-
ing me. Let me speak now, while I’m still of sound mind, we will all lose our
souls if we continue.”
“You haven’t been consulting with the Orisha?” the priest was baffled. “When
was the last time you were able to hear them?”
“The day we murdered that child?” Armon’s words hit the heart of the others.
Before it was a sacrifice that would benefit them all, now it was a murder. “More
and more of these ceremonies are manifested to me. I find all the mysteries of this
book revealing greater secrets and greater powers. I suggest we destroy it now,
before I come for it.
“I will be honest with you all while I still can, there will be a time when none
of you can stop me! I will come for it, and if it means that I would kill you to get
it, I will. I feel that shadow spreading in me, replacing my soul, my dreams show-
ing me what I need to do to be absolute. Destroy it, brothers! And if you need to,
destroy me!”
“Nonsense.” The priest shook his head. “We need only to purify you, make
you clean, and apologize to the Orisha. Once you are in their good graces again,
we can continue.”
Armon felt anger building up in him, the thought of kneeling before the
Orisha seeming to be something he knew he could never do again. His eyes stood
steadfast on the priest, the tent begun to shake as though the earth itself had
moved.
“You all have been warned.” Armon’s voice now carried the anger he feared
would escape him. All that was wholesome and righteous fading from his mind.
He looked over to the book the man had been holding, and it ripped from his
grip, pushing through the air to Armon. He took hold of it, and turned, exiting
the tent.
“Armon!” the priest called out to him as he walked out of the tent. “That
power is for us all, not for you alone.”
“It was meant for me and me alone.” Armon spat. “I was the one that it
revealed its secrets to. It was I that suffered that ceremony. You all sat back and
watched, unsure if it would work. You see the power I possess, and now you want
it for yourself. Forget this book, and forget this power. It belongs to me now.”
 Daniel Vega 127

Racheal cleaned around her house, uncertain how things would turn out. She
looked at the space atop Armon’s altar, where Armon’s Orisha had once stood,
now replaced with a dark figure. She could feel something there, watching her
every move. Where the Orisha had gone was beyond her, and she knew that to
question her husband was not wise.
“Racheal.” Armon’s voice seemed to be changing these last few days. She knew
it had something to do with the new things he was capable of. “I’m going out.”
“I’m scared, Armon.” She said, approaching her husband and sliding her arms
around his waist. “Things have changed so much for us, and I don’t know if it’s
for the better or worse.”
“Change is necessary.” Armon said, rubbing her back as he embraced her. “I
have found a new power, stronger then they could ever imagine, and now they
fear me. They know that to defy me would bring down my judgement on them.”
“Judgement?” Racheal asked, looking up to her husband, and withdrawing her
hands from about him. “You have always taught that judgement is in the hands
of the Orisha! In the hands of God. Why would you judge them after all you’ve
learned and taught?”
“Never again bring the name of the Orisha up in my presences!” Armon
snapped, the house seemed to shaking with his anger. “They are behind me now.
I am greater then them all.”
She stepped back away from him, fears gripping her. Rubbing her hand across
her forehead, she noticed that her arm was covered in blood. Armons’ clothes had
small red patches all over it, she knew that he had dressed himself after being cov-
ered in blood.
“I’m afraid Armon.”
“I told you that you don’t need to fear anyone.” He replied. “I won’t let any-
thing happen to this family.”
“Armon, it’s you that I’m afraid of!” she snapped. “I don’t know what has got-
ten into you, but it goes against everything I believe. Everything you have taught
me you now stand against, and all of your secret ceremonies you conduct at night
have made everyone question us. What is it that you are truly doing?”
“You are my wife, and I truly love you.” Armon’s tone had changed, more
soothing, more understanding now. “I owe you an explanation, so I will give you
one. Come with me, my love.”
Armon turned into the room, approaching his new altar. He held his hand
over it, suddenly it appeared to turn to smoke, and blew away. Now in the place
of the statue was a book, bound in animal skin. He walked to their bed, sitting
down and beckoning her to come as well.
128 The Palo Muerto

She looked at it. He’s hand opening the cover with care, then looking to her
with a smile.
“I feared this at first.” He admitted. “This book defies everything that the
Orisha has taught me. Along with the wisest of our tribe, we studied from it,
hoping that in it we could find a salvation for our village.
“This book only reveals it’s secret to the chosen, and it choose me. Within this
book, there are ceremonies which can pass great power to the one who accom-
plishes them. I have gone through two of these ceremonies, and have received the
full benefit of them.”
“What was the benefit?” she asked, looking up at him, then back to the book.
“Allow me to show you.” Armon placed the book down, the pointed a chair
across the room, without noticed, it lifted into the air and glided through the air
over to the two, then lowered to the ground. “This was the first benefit that was
given me. Now the second.”
Armon held his hand over the chair, and it seemed to turn into black smoke,
shifting in it’s place and transforming into a table. The smoke seemed to turn
solid, Elisha looked up to her husband.
“This is wonderful!” she exclaimed. “You transformed it!”
“No, I simply made it appear as though it is something it’s not.” He corrected.
“It still is a chair, but until I lift the ritual I placed upon it, it will act as it appears
now.”
“What was the cost of gaining such power?” Racheal asked, rubbing her hand
across the table. “Why is it that you have given up what the Orisha has taught
us?”
“To taste this power is to become a slave to it.” Armon explained. “It is like
becoming a curious child again, hungry to satisfy his curiosity. There are many
more ceremonies I must undergo in order to become more then a man, more
then the Orisha. Racheal, though it may hurt you to hear this, I had to kill to
gain this power.
“The cost of the first two ceremonies was the cost of two innocents reaching
the age of enlightenment. The next one requires the blood of a new born child.”
“A new born?” Racheal said, standing up and backing away from her husband.
“You’ve gone mad!
“You would be wise to not judge me so.” Armon advised. “There is nothing
mad in what I have done. And I will continue to fulfill these ceremonies until
there are no more to fulfill.
Racheal turned, running out the house, she grabbed Joseph who had been sit-
ting on the stairs.
 Daniel Vega 129

“You remember this day, Joseph.” Armon’s words formed in Joseph’s mind.
“Allow me now to reveal what happened that night.”

Armon returned into the house, after arguing with his wife, who ran off with
her son. He was upset that the priest had the nerve to threaten him, demanding
him to give up his new power.
“Let them come!” he said to himself. “I will destroy them all! None of them
have the skill to challenge me, let them come.”
Looking over to the book, Armon drained his anger, walking over to it, he
picked it up and begun to read. Wrapped within the mysteries, Armon felt this
spirit stirring, his mind longing to accomplish more, no matter who he would
have to kill. The ability to create fire with though, to control the weather itself, all
the mysteries seemed to be right there in those pages. Now in his hands, chosen
by this dark art, he yarned to fulfill every ceremony, becoming a living God.
The skies darkened as night fell upon them, time seeming to pass quickly as he
turned through the pages of his book. He placed the book down, hearing move-
ment in the next room. Someone was there with him.
He waved his hand over the book when that same dark smoke enveloped it,
then shifted into the dark statue it was before. Placing it on the bed, he knelt
close to the floor awaiting his unwanted guest to show himself.
It didn’t take long for the long bamboo blow dart to reach into the room, then
a face followed. Armon extended his hand, smoke wrapped around the bamboo
blow dark, and it manifested into a cobra. Recoiling from the deadly serpent, the
man dropped it, it striking him twice in the leg.
Armon stared straight at the man, his body lifting into the air, and shooting
backwards through the front door, and crashing against the ground a few feet
away from his front steps.
“Assassin!” Armon whispered, remembering this man. He was the strongest
warrior that this village ever seen.
He began walking through his house, intending on making an example of this
man, when something sharp sunk into his neck. He turned, seeing another man
attempting to put another dart in the bamboo pipe, lifting his hand, the man
came off the floor, crashing into the ceiling. Armon waved his hand, and the man
flew toward him, stopping and maintained suspended in midair.
Armon took hold of the bamboo pipe, smoke wrapped around it, as he
plunged it forward, it became a knife. Sinking into the man’s heart, he let it go,
waving his hand, the man flew out the front door, crashing into the other man.
130 The Palo Muerto

The knife turned back into its original bamboo pipe. He reached up pulling the
dart from his neck, feeling his body growing weaker. He looked toward the door
seeing two other men approach, but his vision became blurred.
Two darts sunk into Armon’s chest. He knew that they were dipped in power-
ful poisons, used in Santeria ceremonies. Now it was a matter of time before he
would lose all bodily functions, and slip into unconsciousness. The two men
rushed in, he could see that they were preparing to shoot him again
Armon howled out, extending his hands, both men rose into the air. He
clenched his hands into a fist, focusing his thoughts, the two men seemed to be
crushing under an unseen force. He opened his hands, and the two mens’ body
split in two. He tossed his hands to each side, and their bodies crashed against
each wall.
He went down on his knee, attempting to fight against the poison, he’s
thoughts went back to the book. “I have to save it.”
All was dark.
“Armon!” it was Racheal.
He forced his eyes opened, how long he was unconscious was unknown to
him, but the house was now consumed in fire. He looked back, seeing that the
statue was still on the bed. The fire flicking around it, though it seemed unaf-
fected.
“Racheal, they shot me with darts.” Armon said. “Take the boy and run.”
“You are my husband! I promised to never leave your side. If you die then I
die with you.”
He’s wife fell to the ground. He looked at her seeing the darts in her neck.
“Joseph!” he said, seeing his son running into the house.
A man was preparing to dart him, but he managed to use his dark art to toss
him aside. The poison was spreading through him, and he knew that soon he
would be unable to do anything other then die. He cast his thoughts to his son,
forcing him out the house.
Two men were now approaching him with clubs now.
“Not while I’m alive!” Armon thought to himself. “He needs to exceed me.”
He lifted his hands to the ceiling, bringing it crashing down over the door. He
kept pulling down until the house fell on him. All faded to darkness.

“This is what truly happened my son.” Armon’s voice formed in Joseph’s

thoughts. “I can now pass this power to you, if you will receive them.”
“Do you think it would be wise for me to partake of it?” Joseph asked. “With
all that has happened to you, should I continue in your work?”
 Daniel Vega 131

“The power is safe, son.” Encouraged Armon. “Your will must be strong to
control it. Receive it, and recover my book. You must bring judgement to those
that did this to me. You must show the world our power.”
“Yes Father.” Joseph agreed. “I will receive it.”
“Then it is yours.”
 11

Emmanuel walked by a river bank, his two godsons following behind him. The
sky was clear, the sun shining down on this day. The high humidity and the heat
from the sun made their clothing stick to them uncomfortably. Looking in the
water, Emmanuel strained his eyes to see something.
“That’s it!” he said, pointing into the waters. He took a few steps into the
water, removing a white stone and laying it out on the ground.
“Are you sure this is it?” Luis asked, June standing by paying close attention.
Emmanuel placed his hand on the stone, closing his eyes, he opened his
senses.
“Emmanuel.” The voice was faint, but nevertheless, it was Jacobs’ voice.
“Take me home.”
“It’s Jacob!” Emmanuel smiled. “Now we have to find David.”
“I don’t get it.” June admitted. “What are we doing here? We never did this in
Cuba.”
“This is how we honor our ancestors.” Emmanuel explained, placing the large
stone inside a backpack, and putting it on his back. “When someone we love
passes, we wait for the first heavy rainfall, then come to the river closest to our
home. It is here that the rain returns them to us, their essences drawing in the
stones, awaiting for us to return them home.”
“So you mean that I have to look for Chris?” June asked, looking into the
water. “Of course, that’s why I brought you with us.”

- 132 -
 Daniel Vega 133

“Well damn.” Said June. He looked at them, then looked into the water.
“Thanks for letting me know. Now how does this shit work? How do I know
which stone I have to take home?”
“You’ll know when you see it.” Emmanuel explained. “Just look and wait
until one of them catches your eye, or if you see one and Chris pops up in your
mind, that’s the one.”
“Aiite.” He answered. “I gotcha.”
They continued their walk, looking into the river, Luis the only one free to let
his thoughts roam. Half the morning was spent, and as they came to a large
wooden bridge, Emmanuel stopped again, and stepped into the water. Reaching
in, he lifted a large stone, a light red color to it. He placed it on the ground. June
walked into the water, lifting a stone that the other had been rested upon.
“You think you found him?” Emmanuel asked.
“Yeah yo.” June answered, a strange expression on his face. “I’m not used to
this, but when you picked up that stone, and my eyes fell on this one, I smelled
the cologne that he used to wear. I felt the hair stand on the back of my neck, and
I could have sworn I heard him whisper for me to take him home.”
“You got it!” Emmanuel smiled. “But we’ll find out for sure, just give me a
minute.”
Emmanuel placed his hand on the stone he pulled from the river. He cleared
his thoughts, opening his senses, he felt a strong connection to David, looking up
to the other he smiled, when suddenly he felt a pull to his neck.
Almost as though someone placed their arm around his neck, and pulled him
down, he found himself with his ear to the stone.
“Emmanuel!” David’s voice was strong, and he could feel his power. “You
have to stop Joseph! If he gets his hand on Armon’s book, then all is lost. Don’t
let my death be in vain!”
Emmanuel felt the force disappear, and suddenly, he went flying back. He
stood up, and picked up the stone.
“You okay?” Luis asked, watching as Emmanuel stared at the stone.
“Yeah,” he started, still looking at the stone. “David gave me a message, a very
powerful one.”
“What did he say?” June asked, still keeping his stone close to him.
“Our fight with Joseph is far from over.” Emmanuel answered.
He looked at the two of them, placing the stone in a different backpack, and
handing it to Luis. As he placed it on his back, Emmanuel walked over, and knelt
next to June.
134 The Palo Muerto

“Let’s see if this is Chris.” Emmanuel said, placing his hand on the stone. He
opened himself up. Something caught his eye at his side. Smiling, he looked to
June. “Would you like to see him?”
June looked over, feeling his heart leap in his chest.
“See him?” June asked. “You mean Chris?”
“Yeah.” Emmanuel continued to smile. “Give me your hand.”
June reached his hand out, Emmanuel grabbed it and placed it on the stone.
He nodded at June, then placed his hand on top of June’s and pointed beside
him. A frog developed in his throat, as the light from the sun seemed to gather in
front of him.
Chris stood there, smiling, wearing a white suit with his hands folded. He
took a step, and was instantly face to face with June, reaching his hand out, he
rubbing his hand over his cheek, attempting to wipe away his tears.
“Don’t cry.” Chris words formed in June’s mind. “I’m here my nigga. We ride
and die together to the end!”
June smiled as tears streamed down his face. He reached out his hand as
though to touch Chris, only to find his hand pass through him. With a nod, he
vanished, June fell down over the stone saying, “But I didn’t ride with you!”
“It was his path.” Emmanuel said, placing his hand on June’s shoulder. “Yours
was a different one, and look how far you’ve come. You don’t need to feel as
though you turned away from him, because as you see, he still loves you.”
“Thank you.” June said, wiping his face, and standing up. “You kept every
promise you made to me. I’ve been through so much yo, and no one ever been
more real with me, then you did yo.”
“Don’t thank me.” Emmanuel said, feeling tears forming in his eyes, and yet
fighting them back. “I’m only a tool for the Orisha to do their work with. All that
you think I’ve done for you, was really the Orisha working through me. They
deserve your thanks. That’s why it’s so important for you to build your relation-
ship with them, honor and respect them.”
June lifted the stone, cradling it in his arm, looking at them both.
“Well what do we do with them now?” he asked, whipping the tears from his
face.
“Now we go home.” Emmanuel answered, turning and leading the way back
to the car.

An increase of business came to Emmanuel’s bontanica. With the help of Luis

and June, they were able to undo a lot of negativity, and wrong doings placed
upon people. He was glad to see that his godsons were there, learning from him,
 Daniel Vega 135

his knowledge passing on to the next generation. Just after the last customer
walked through the door, he turned to the two.
“You guys ready to call it a night?” he asked.
“You know it!” Luis said with a smile. “I got a little sumin sumin waiting for
me tonight.”
“Aw, you know you ain’t right.” Emmanuel smiled, tossing the key to Luis.
“You think your god brother wants to hear that you about to get some.”
“Oh.” Luis laughed. “That’s right. You’re still backed up!”
“Fuck you.” June flipped his middle finger at Luis. “It’s aiite, I’ma wait, but
when this year is up, don’t expect to hear from me for like a month.”
June turned the lights out. Luis was lower the gates to the window when June
ran to the door.
“Padrino!” he exclaimed. “Isn’t that Joseph?”
Emmanuel ran to the door, seeing his unforgettable face, as he stood across the
street. He appeared to be waiting, looking over at them, relaxed and casual. He
swung the door opened, walking across the street, Luis watching him, unaware of
the man’s presence. June followed, beckoning for him to follow.
“You have some nerve showing you face around here!” Emmanuel stopped in
front of Joseph. “I figured you would have been hiding under a rock!”
“Why would I want to do that?” Joseph asked. “I don’t see you as an enemy,
Emmanuel. You have never been my fight, we both shared the same enemy, but
he is gone now. Why can’t we bury the hatchet?”
“Because of you,” Emmanuel spat through clenched teeth. “I buried a brother!
You and I will never be friends, and our battle is far from over.”
“I’m truly sorry to hear that.” Joseph nodded his head. “I have so much
power, and I was hoping to share it with you. Just think about this. You live in a
place were evil runs wild, so few righteous people around to take on all this nega-
tivity. With the knowledge I would share with you, nothing can over come you!”
“With my Orisha, nothing can overcome me!” Emmanuel reflected his anger
through his eyes. “The power you play with is a power that’s tainted in darkness.
Your father failed, David failed, and you too will fail.”
“Consider my offer Emmanuel.” Joseph pleaded. “Don’t make any decisions
in anger. You could completely overlook this wonderful opportunity, let me leave
you with a small taste of what I’m talking about.”
Joseph held out a notepad and let it fall, his body consumed in smoke as it
came against the ground. Emmanuel took a step back, the wind carrying the
smoke away and evidence that Joseph had ever been standing before him.
136 The Palo Muerto

“What the fuck kind of shit is that?” Luis asked, walking to where Joseph had
been, and waving his hand around. “He disappeared in a cloud of black smoke!
Padrino, I ain’t ever seen anything like that.”
Emmanuel bent down, picked up the note book, rolling it in his hand. He
turned to the others, shaking his head, and walking over to his car. He looked to
Luis, as he finished locking the gates to the Botanica, and got in the car.
“I’ve never seen anything like that either.” Emmanuel whispered to himself,
though he knew the others had heard him. “Father, help me understand how this
could be.”
“You don’t have to worry now.” Eleggua materialized in the back seat, his
words forming in Emmanuel’s mind. “That power he inherited from the union
with Armon, before he was killed 23 years ago, Armon found a book which con-
tains evil ceremonies. He complete two, which required the blood of children,
and from it, gained that unholy power. Joseph learned this from his father, but it
won’t be long before he attempts to get this book back.”
“Where did this book come from?” Emmanuel asked. “And where is it?”
“The book was created by the oldest man to walk this earth.” Eleggua
explained. “Olosi” after completing it, he passed it on to man, watching as his
wickedness destroyed some of the first civilizations to inhabit this earth. It was
agreed by us Orisha that the book would be kept in the hands of the faithful, for-
ever guarded by our children.
“Unfortunately, the book was passed into Armon’s hands to guard. He
thought to use its power to benefit his village, but that power comes from evil.
Had he succeeded in completing all 27 ceremonies, he would have extended his
life, and even have power to control the weather. As it stands, he has great power,
but nothing you couldn’t overcome with my help.”
“So where is it now?” Emmanuel asked again.
“In good hands.” Eleggua explained. “It’s guarded by the priests that defeated
Armon all those years ago, after understanding what it was capable of, they are
now taking extra care to see to it that it never falls in the wrong hands again.
“What you have to do is elevate Armon. If you can do this that evil power will
fade from Joseph, then his own fate will see to it that Joseph has no knowledge of
that power ever again.”
“Why don’t you stop him?” Emmanuel asked. “Why don’t you take care of
Joseph now?”
“This is a world for man, Emmanuel.” Eleggua smiled at him. “You are all
here to learn and grow from each life you experience. Joseph is learning and full-
 Daniel Vega 137

ing his fate, just as you are. So now, the Evils of man must be over come by the
righteousness of man. He is in your hands now, Emmanuel, so get moving.”

Emmanuel tossed his keys on the table next to his recliner, sitting down and
opening the notebook Joseph had given him. June and Luis sat on the couch, sit-
ting and waiting silently, for some news from Emmanuel.
Opening the cover, he saw the hand written explanation of the first two cere-
monies. He gasped, bringing his hand to his mouth, full of fear of what would
happen should these evil rites be known to all mankind. He thumbed through
the pages, trying to understand where the power comes from to use these dark
abilities. He closed the book and walked over to his kitchen.
“What are you doing?” Luis asked, watching as Emmanuel turned the stove
on, holding the notebook over it.
The flames begun to eat its way up the book, Emmanuel tossed it in the sink,
waiting for it to be destroyed completely, when the book begun to turn into that
same smoke that enveloped Joseph. The smoke lingered in the sink, then slowly
rose together, like a large smoke ring, shifting until it took the form of a snake. It
fell to the floor, and turned solid, raising up to reveal the head of a king cobra.
It struck out to its side, as if to bite someone that wasn’t there, it’s poison drip-
ping on the floor, which begun to form another cobra. Then another, and
another, crawling across the floor.
“Don’t believe what you think you see!” Emmanuel shouted to the two as they
jumped atop the couch. “They are illusions created by this dark power. They can
only hurt you if you believe they exist.”
The entire first level of Emmanuel’s house was now over run by serpents.
They slithered around him, as though he wasn’t even there, when he bent down
and grabbed one by the neck.
“Return to the source!” he commanded the creature, holding it in his hand,
watching as it turned to smoke and vanished. “I command you all, return to the
source!” he shouted, bringing his foot down to the floor.
The house vibrated, the snakes begun to pop as though they were balloons
carrying that dark smoke within them. Just as quickly as they appeared, they all
vanished, leaving the three as though they had never been there.
“How did you do that?” Luis asked. “They’re not a spirit to command.”
“No.” Emmanuel agreed. “But they are still part of this world, and governed
by the same higher power that we all obey. It’s negative energy, taken form and
manipulated. It’s all a matter of purifying them, just as you would purify any neg-
ative energy in this world.”
138 The Palo Muerto

“This Joseph is really started to scare the shit outta me, now.” June admitted.
“I hope you don’t mind Padrino, but my ass is spending the night here.”
“You know what?” Emmanuel smiled. “I think you will, it’s time you learn a
ceremony yourself. I think I know how we’re going to make this all come to a
pass.”

As the sun rose on the horizon, the shadows seemed to retreat from the rapidly
advancing sunlight, spreading across the streets of Philadelphia. Emmanuel stood
at his window, feeling the warmth of the morning light spread across his face. He
turned around, kicking the couch where June had been sleeping, watching as his
eyes shot opened, attempting to quickly process what was going on around him.
“It’s time.” Emmanuel said, turning back to the window. “Wake up your god
brother. Tell him to get ready, and bring my things down.”
June tossed his legs over the edge of the couch, sitting up and stretching out.
After running his hand over his now fuzzy head, he rose to his feet and walked up
the stairs.
“You need to know where you’re going.” Eleggua’s words came into his head.
“He’s already begun his way back home. You’re going to have to fly again, cross
the waters and tell them that you must hold the book. If we are to prevent Joseph
from getting his hands on it, it must be in ours.”
“From this moment forward, we must commit ourselves to accomplishing this
task, even at the expense of my own life!” Emmanuel felt passionate. “I’ve
thought long and hard all night, father. I know that if he gets his hands on it, this
world will suffer. If I must give myself to the cause, then so be it! Looking at my
god sons, I know my work will continue, I know that they will always push to
right wrongs, and bring a peace on a small part of the world.”
“If you cross into this fight, then you need to do it with the understanding
that you might not survive.” Eleggua admitted. “Death is a certainty that all men
are bound by. It’s never been about how you die, but what you do in between the
time you are born and the day you cross over, that makes your journey worth
anything. You are in my hands, and I will do everything to keep you safe. Have
faith, and I will carry you out of this battle alive. Doubt and you will see your last
morning in this window.”

“I ain’t know what to pack for Africa!” June laughed, sitting back in his seat.
“You know a nigga gonna be decked out up in that little ass village.”
“Yeah, I was breaking my head, looking for shit to take.” Luis laughed with
June.
 Daniel Vega 139

“Whatever you packed is gonna get ruined.” Emmanuel laughed at them.

“We’re going to be in the wilderness. We’re not staying in any city. We’re staying
in the jungle. These people we’re meeting with are very dedicated to their con-
nection with the Orisha. They live as we were meant to be, balanced with
nature.”
“Damn yo!” June protested. “There go my white sneaks!”
“I know man,” Luis laughed. “I brought my timberlands!”
“Should’ve asked if you wasn’t sure.” Emmanuel learned back, closing his
eyes. “This isn’t a chance to take a vacation, where you try and sleep with every
attractive girl you see. We’re trying to stop, and confront probably the most dan-
gerous man on this planet. I don’t know what the two of you thought this trip
would be like, but you better get your mind in the right state if we’re going to be
successful.”

“They’re following.” Armon’s words came into Joseph’s mind. “They’re air-
borne.”
“We can’t have them showing up and spoiling our plans!” Joseph brought his
hand down against the armrest to his seat. The man next to him eyed him suspi-
ciously. “So they’re a flight behind me?”
“Yes.” Said Armon.
“We’ll be out numbered.” Joseph traced his goatee with his hand. “The priests
in the village wouldn’t be much of a fight against me, but if Emmanuel is there to
help, then we can’t succeed alone. I know just how to even the playing field.”
“Can you please lower your voice?” the man next to Joseph protested. “Who
the hell are you talking to anyway? Just my luck, being seated next to a crazy
man!”
Joseph looked the man up and down, eyeing the briefcase between his legs,
and the opened laptop on his lap. It was obvious to see that he was traveling for
business reasons, graphs and charts on the laptops’ display screen. Smiling to
himself, Joseph leaned over.
“Would you like to know whom I’m talking to?” he squinted his eyes, staring
into that of the man’s, watching as his expression changed from frustration, to
pure horror. The man attempted to turn his head away, but Joseph grabbed his
hand and pulled him closer to him. “Don’t run now! You wanted to know, you
thought I was crazy, right? Now look, and satisfy your curiosity!”
A shadow passed over Joseph’s shoulder, the man tried to scream but no
sound escaped his lips. Foam begun to form on the side of his mouth. Images of
Joseph’s laughter filled his eyes. All went dark.
140 The Palo Muerto

“Yo man. You should have told me how long that flight was gonna be!” June
stretched out in the airport, stomping his feet against the ground in hopes to
bring feeling back faster. “I swear I’m thinking of moving here just to avoid that
flight back home.”
“You cry too much.” Luis laughed, picking up his suitcase.
“Nigga, my ass is asleep!” June protested. “How you figure? You know damn
well that you hated that long ass flight.”
“I did, but I’m not complaining about it.” Luis unbuttoned the two buttons
to his shirt, fanning himself. “I wish I could look forward to a nice bed, but I
know Padrino is gonna go straight to this village in the middle of nowhere.”
“Sleep on the way.” Emmanuel snapped, walking past them, toward the exit
of the airport. “I got a jeep waiting for us, and a guide that’ll take us there. It’s
gonna be a bumping ride, so your ass will wake up before we get there.”
Emmanuel was followed by the two, out the airport, looking at the old and
beat up Jeep that he began loading his luggage into.
“Yo, how long is this ride?” June asked, putting his suitcase in the back of the
jeep. “I hope it ain’t gonna be as long as that flight.”
“It’s 12 noon now,” Stated Emmanuel. “So we should be there about 9:00,
assuming we don’t have any problems on the way.”
“I ain’t even gonna ask!” said Luis, sitting in the back of the jeep.
“I feel you on that one.” June agreed and joined his brother.
“I swear, if I hear someone ask, are we there yet, I’ma leave you stranded.”
Emmanuel sat in the passenger seat as they pulled off.
Emmanuel begun talking in another language to the driver as they pulled off.
Luis and June looked at each other, baffled from their Padrino’s knowledge in
this foreign language.
“What the hell?” June said, looking to Luis. “I ain’t know he knew another
language, I mean, aside from the Orisha’s native tongue.”
“Well I think that it may be Yoruba he’s speaking.” Luis said, leaning in to lis-
ten to Emmanuel. “I can make out some of what he’s saying, but it’s a slightly
different dialect. Maybe I’ll ask him about it when we get there.”
“My ass is gonna fall asleep again.” June laughed.
“I’ma try and sleep.” Luis said, leaning back and closing his eyes.

Joseph watched Emmanuel drive off in a jeep, accompanied with his godsons.
Seeing that everything was as he anticipated, a sinister grin stretched out across
his face.
 Daniel Vega 141

“We can’t be careless this time.” Armon’s words came to his thoughts. “I don’t
know if it was a good idea that he gets there first.”
“It’s perfect.” Joseph disagreed. “With Emmanuel there, they will bring the
book out in the open for us. All we need to do is go and retrieve it. It will save us
time with trying find it ourselves.”
“He will be better prepared if he has time to gather his forces there.” Armon
pointed out.
“That’s what I want, Father.” Joseph laughed. “With the knowledge you’ve
given me, and the knowledge I have, we’re going to show these fools why we are
absolute! I will march in that village striking fear in their hearts! They will all see
the after life, but for a moment, then become my slaves forever.”

Music. Opening his eyes, June knew it was music he was hearing. A string
instrument. He lifted his head, to see that the jeep still pushed on, Emmanuel sat
in the front playing a guitar. He sat up, listening to as Emmanuel’s fingers danced
across the guitar. Peace seemed to settle down on June, he tapped Luis, waking
him from his sleep to hear.
Luis sat up, looking at the guitar, then looked at June as if to asked, “when he
learn to play?”
The sun was disappearing off in the distance, and the jeep pushed onward,
though the music continued to play. Emmanuel had his eyes closed, and his head
down as he felt the music pour from him. He lifted his head, still playing, to see
his spectators.
“What?” he asked, stopped and letting the guitar rest on his lap. “What’s
wrong?”
“Nothing.” Luis answered. “I just never seen you play before, ain’t even know
you knew how to play.”
“My brother taught me that piece.” Emmanuel admitted. “I don’t know, but
when I’m down, or afraid, that piece puts some peace in my soul.”
“Yeah I know.” June admitted. “I felt what you were playing, like you were
putting each note right inside of me.”
“Listen, since you’re both awake, I’ve been meaning to tell you something.”
Emmanuel shifted in his seat, to face the two in the back. “If anything should
happen to me when we face Joseph…”
“Don’t worry Padrino.” Luis cut him off. “Everything’s gonna be okay.”
“Listen to me.” Emmanuel’s voice carried his authority. “Should something
happen to me, I want the two of you to promise me, you will continue on with all
142 The Palo Muerto

the great things we started. My soul would never find peace if the two of you gave
up the faith.”
“Padrino.” June leaned up, putting his hand on Emmanuel’s shoulder. “I have
all the faith in the world that we’re all gonna walk away from this fine. If some-
thing happens and you don’t make it, I will always honor the Orisha, because I
know through them I will see you again.”
Luis nodded his head, and patted Emmanuel on the other shoulder, giving his
silent promise.
“Good.” Emmanuel smiled, picking up his guitar. “My brother thought me
this piece. Listen.”
Emmanuel allowed his fingers to dance to his own tune, over the strings of the
guitar. He remembered someone once saying that music was a form of expres-
sion, coming straight from the soul. As he played, he allowed himself to close his
thoughts and feel the passion escape through his finger tips.
Expression of the soul, he thought to himself. His fingers moved, the music
touching their hearts, but Emmanuel’s memory carried him off.

21 years ago
Emmanuel wanted to nothing more then to remove the blind fold from his face.
His knees ached from hours of kneeing, and mouth begging for water. Four the
past hour, he endured his crowning, not knowing exactly what was happening
around him.
Elisha and David were there as well, a few feet away, in the same condition as
he was. How many times he was offered something to drink, only to taste some
liquid that burned his throat and had tasted horrible. They all longed for this part
to be over.
A drum started off in the camp, not far from them. It was a single note at first.
Emmanuel’s attention focused on the sound, to hear multiple drums erupt
around him. He could feel the air around him shift as people passed by him,
know that there were others there dancing amongst them instantly.
He could feel his heart beating in his chest, feel his body begin to rock to the
beat. Something seemed to be building up in him, Emmanuel could feel himself
wanting to cry out, but he dared not open his mouth in fear of what words might
escape.
Someone begins to sing in the language he had been hearing people speaking
all day, and in the phrase he could hear Eleggua’s being call. He strained to make
sense of it, but noticed that he was no longer kneeling down. On his feet now, his
little frame engaged in a dance he had no control over.
 Daniel Vega 143

Emmanuel ripped his blind fold off, and begun swirling around the camp fire,
surprised that everyone had back around from him. Everything felt like a dream,
and slowly he could feel himself slipping away. He tried to target exactly what it
was that he was feeling, when he could feel something welling up inside of him.
Warmth spread across him, for a moment it felt as though his feet were no longer
touching the floor.
The music stopped and the priest had stared at Emmanuel with his mouth
opened. People pointed at the young boy, whose body seemed to be suspended in
the air, bright lights surrounding him. Emmanuel rotated his head to a beat that
no longer played, his pupils seemed to vanish, only to return a light blue.
Several people dropped to their knees, unsure of what was happening, though
they felt a comforting power emanating from the young boy. Emmanuel’s feet
came softly down to the ground, he walked over to the priest and placed his small
hand on him.
Peace spread throughout the priest’s body, along with an undescribable feeling
of love and passion. For a moment, he thought he could feel the love in the
young boy’s heart he carried for Eleggua. Emmanuel seized up, and fell to the
ground unconscious. A man quickly ran forward and put Emmanuel back in his
place, returning the blind fold to his eyes.
Jacob was off on the side, the priest walked over to him and kissed his hand.
“You have brought a blessing to my life.” The old priest said. “Because of you,
I have been touched by a boy that has been touched by god himself.”
 12

Upon arriving in the village, passing through a mountain pass, tall stone walls
providing only one way, in or out of the village. All of Luis’s misunderstandings
vanished when he saw houses, though appearing as flats, the illusion in his mind
of sleeping in tents quickly vanished. It was still very much the wilderness where
they were. The jungle was their backyard, nevertheless, he knew that wearing his
white sneakers were out of the question.
He waited just at the front of the village, their guide running into the village,
and into a large house. Emmanuel just stood there, when a man walked out the
flat, his robes and beaded necklaces clearly gave everyone the perception of a
priest.
He approached them, crossing his arms and pounding them on his chest with
respect. Emmanuel did the same, as did his godsons. Luis was expecting to see an
old man dressed in this fashion, but instead he was looking at a man near his mid
thirties. His dark complexion, brown curly hair, and neatly trimmed beard could
have easily passed for someone that lived on his street, had he been in jeans and a
T-shirt.
“I know what brings you here.” The priest said, looking the three over. “For
the past month my ancestors have been showing me this meeting. Someone is
coming, and they seek to gain access to something we’ve been defending from the
beginning of our civilization.”
“That’s correct.” Emmanuel said, nodding his head. “I’m sure you are aware
of the one that used it before, Armon.”

- 144 -
 Daniel Vega 145

“Yes, we don’t speak his name here.” The priest said. “We will not honor him
as an ancestor. We are hoping to make his name fade away in time.”
“That won’t be possible.” Emmanuel frowned, looking at the priest. “Armon
has been honored through the form of a Palo Muerto, and has reunited with his
son.”
“No!” the priest said with intensity. “This can’t be!”
“I’m sorry to inform you, but as he we speak, he draws near.” Emmanuel said,
looking over his shoulder to the mountain pass. “He has gained all the knowledge
and power that his father gained from those dark ceremonies. I’ve come to defend
it, even if it cost me my life.”
“It troubles to hear you speak this way.” The priest said, shaking his head.
“For years, legends of the American that has been touched by God, has given us
all so much hope, helped us to aspire to be as you are. If you believe so little in
yourself that you would fail at this task, then what are we to believe in?”
“Padrino is a legend.” June whispered, elbowing Luis with a smile on his face.
“Oh shit, that’s a free pass to all the pussy in this village.”
“Shut up Yawo!” Luis snapped, with a smile on his face, a reminder of his year
of purification.
“Fuck!” June whispered, which almost reached the ears of the priest.
“Well, come on in.” The priest said, placing his hand on Emmanuel’s shoul-
ders and walking him toward his house, followed by his god sons. “We can talk in
greater lengths inside. There are some things that you need to be made aware of.”
They walked into the flat, taking their shoes off, and sitting down in chairs.
The priest disappeared in the back of the house, then reappeared with something
wrapped in a white cloth.
“How much do you know about Armon?” he asked, sitting down and placing
the cloth on his lap.
“Only that he gained access to this book that’s believed to be written by Olosi
himself.” Emmanuel began. “I know that through these dark ceremonies, he was
able to gain access to some dark powers, and lost his soul in the process.”
“That’s right.” The priest said, nodding his head. “What makes you believe
that Olosi wrote this book?”
“Eleggua spoke to me on it.” Emmanuel admitted. “He said that he intro-
duced it to the first civilization, and it nearly destroyed them.”
“That’s right.” The priest said. “But we’ve come to believe that it wasn’t writ-
ten by Olosi, but its Olosi transformed.”
“Excuse me.” June interrupted. “Who is Olosi? I never heard of any Orisha by
that name.”
146 The Palo Muerto

“Yawo.” Emmanuel’s one word seemed explain the priests’ curiosity.

“Then let me enlighten him.” The priest began. “Olosi was the first man cre-
ated. He was blessed and given immortality, which caused him to believe was
God. His pride was overwhelming, and he attempted to make all of God’s cre-
ation obey him. When God learned of it, he destroyed everything, in hopes to
also destroy this immortal man.
“What we are gifted with by God, can never be taken away, so Olosi survived
God’s anger, though had become burned and deformed. It is believed that from
time to time, he comes out of hiding to tempt man, to curse God with him.”
“So he’s the devil?” June asked.
“No, he is simply a man that cannot die.” The priest answered. “But he can
trick you, after all, being around since the beginning of time can provide anyone
with the means to obtain a lot of knowledge. Well Emmanuel, we believe that
Olosi transformed himself into this book, which is why people become consumed
by its dark power.”
“So where is it?” Emmanuel asked.
“That’s the thing that troubles us all.” The priest said. “After the fire was
turned out, no one was able to find it amongst Armons’ belongings. The only
thing that was in his home was this.”
The priest unfolded the cloth, and revealed a black statue of a man. He
handed it over to Emmanuel, he turned it noting that it was a statue of Armon
himself, exalted as if he were God.
“This entire time, you’re been holding the book in that cloth.” Emmanuel
smiled. “Armon was able to gain a power to manipulate things. He can pretty
much alter anything to appear and act as whatever it is he desires. I saw this
power myself, when he used it against me in my own home. Here, let me show
you.”
Emmanuel put the statue on the floor between everyone, and held his hand
over it. He closed his eyes, and concentrated, the statue begun to smoke and
expand. He blew from his mouth, and the smoke cleared, revealing a large book
bound in skin.
“By the Orisha!” the priest exclaimed, reaching out and picking the book up
with shaking hands. “You know this dark art?”
“No.” Emmanuel admitted. “But I learned that this power still obeys the
Orisha.”
“You are truly touched by God.” The priest said, looking Emmanuel over, and
opening the book.
 Daniel Vega 147

“No!” Emmanuel snapped, reaching out and taking the book away from the
priest. “This book will be better kept closed. Its power can tempt anyone, and for
that reason, should never be opened!”
“Then it will be as you say.” The priest said, folding the cloth in his hand.
“Maybe it will be safer in your hands.”
“My hands will be busy with Joseph if he gets this far.” Emmanuel admitted.
“Gather your council, and tell them what you have learned. Let them decide the
best course of action, but also, make them understand that everyone needs to be
on guard. Joseph is extremely dangerous, and we will need everyone if we are to
prevail.”
The priest walked to the door, the guide still standing at the door like a guard.
He whispered in his ear, and the man ran off.

Joseph finished putting a tent up, turning on a lantern, he sat in his tent with
a pen and a note book.
“Now that we have time, Father, let’s finish.” Joseph said, watching as his
father appeared next to him in the tent.
“Finish?” Armon asked. “You have taken down all that I managed to remem-
ber. Without the book, you can get no farther.”
“What good are these ceremonies if you can’t remember them in their
entirety?” Joseph snapped. “You’re proving to be as useless as every other Muerto
I have risen!”
“You would be wise to watch how you address me!” Armon snapped.
“Sorry, father.” Joseph said, realizing that his father felt fear for his son’s
anger. “It’s been a long journey, and the stress is wearing on me.”
“You need to rest and gather your thoughts.” Armon attempted to comfort his
son. “I like this plan you put together.”
“Indeed it will work to our advantage.” Joseph smiled. “I know how these
people think. I thought like them myself at one point. When they see the horrors,
they will forget everything. I need you to do something though.”
“You need only to ask.” Armon said. “What can I do for you, Son?”
“I need to know what they are doing.” Said Joseph. “Go to them, watch them,
come back with any news, and tomorrow morning we will do the unthinkable.”

“So what’s happening?” June asked, watching the priest as he arranged the fur-
niture around the room.
“Well this priest, Kadin, he’s the chief here.” Emmanuel explained. “He’s
going to assemble the other priest from the village and they’ll brainstorm as to
148 The Palo Muerto

what we need to do. This village was built here to defend this book at all cost,
which is why it’s in a valley in the middle of no where. They have defenses. I’m
sure they’ll be little resistance when it comes to taking counter measures.”
They turned as two other priests entered the house, saluting Kadin, and talk-
ing amongst each other. They took a seat, waiting as two others came in and sat
down. Emmanuel walked over to the guide, who had returned a few moments
ago.
“I need my bag.” Emmanuel said, his expressions sober. “The small black one,
looks like a guitar case.”
“Right away.” The man said, running to the jeep.
“You plan on playing music for everyone?” Luis asked, watching the man lift
the case from the jeep and run back over.
“Something like that, just keep an eye on your brother.” Emmanuel said,
moving as the last priest entered the house, and sat down.
Kadin stood up, preparing to address everyone, Emmanuel interrupting as he
pulled out his Palo of Eleggua.
“Before we continue.” Emmanuel said, walking to the middle of the room.
“Someone here doesn’t belong.”
“Excuse me?” Kadin asked, one eye brow arched. “Everyone here is a trusted
priest, and member of the council.”
“And they all belong here.” Emmanuel said, backing up to the wall opposite
the door. “But this one isn’t”
Emmanuel lifted his Palo of Eleggua, and stomped his foot. Everyone heard as
a voice screamed in the room. He began chanting in the language of the Orisha,
the priest all stood and joined him.
Armon appeared in the room, moving forward and wrapping his hand around
Emmanuel’s neck, he lifted him off the ground.
“How is this possible?” Kadin asked, shocked that this spirit possessed such
power.
Emmanuel lifted the Palo of Eleggua between him and Armon, pressing down
he released Emmanuel and moved toward the door.
“Halt spirit!” Emmanuel brought his foot down on the floor with the Palo
Extended. Armon froze. “You belong on another plan, and by Eleggua’s name,
may you be elevated.”
Armon howled in pain as Emmanuel continued to chant, some opposing force
preventing him from escaping.
“No!” Armon extended his hand, and to Emmanuel’s horror, the Palo shat-
tered.
 Daniel Vega 149

Armon disappeared, the astonished expressions of all the priest bearing evi-
dence that they never saw such a display of power.
“Armon!” Emmanuel told the others. “Spying for his son. He knows that we
are here, but now we can consult without him knowing what we are up to. Rest
assured though, he’s close and he’s ready to attack, we too must be ready.”
A man ran into the room carrying in his hand a long wooden staff, symbols
carved in it. He was tall, with a light complexion. His straight brown hair was
well kept, with deep brown eyes, evident that he had seen great horrors in life. He
stood ready for combat, assessing the room but seeing no danger. He relaxed and
looked to the others.
“This is Remy.” Kadin introduced to Emmanuel. “He is the only one of us
that stayed true to the ancient training of the Orisha. It was a set of skills passed
down through the generations, designed to fight off this exact type of Evil. He
has served as my personal body guard.”
“It seems we may have a fighting chance after all.” Emmanuel said, smiling at
the warrior.
“Brothers.” Kadin started, looking over the others. “I was hoping to ease you
into this news, unfortunately, we have to lay everything on the table.”
“Armon had a son.” Emmanuel explained. “His name is Joseph, and he has a
Palo Muerto of his father. Through this, he was able to gain knowledge and
power that his father had in life. He’s here, and he’s coming to finish where his
father left off. That’s about it, in a nut shell.”

With morning, came work. Emmanuel and Kadin walked around the village,
passing instructions to the people of the tribe, measuring their counter measures.
Their guide had left, in hopes at attempting to attract members of other tribes to
come and defend a relic that was only spoken of in tales.
“So we’ll mount a small force on the mountain top along the pass.” Emman-
uel thought aloud. “When Joseph comes, we can hold him back while someone
signals his approach. We’ll have everyone else here, with a force to hold off a
small army. I hope we’re over doing it, but something tells me that he’ll manage
to get this far.”
“If he does, then we’ll be here to face him.” Kadin said. “To think that I will
be fighting side by side of a living legend.”
“Draw a circle of protection for me.” Emmanuel instructed, walking to the
center of the village, facing the mountain pass. “Right here. I’ll be here, and when
he comes, he’ll have no choice but to face me first. I want you, along with my
150 The Palo Muerto

godsons, to be waiting in ambush. When the time comes you must begin the ele-
vation ceremony on Joseph.”
“You wish to elevate him?” Kadin asked. “I don’t understand why.”
“Because that will remove Armon from the picture.” Emmanuel explained.
“I’m hoping that with Armon gone, Joseph’s power will fade. Once this is done,
we can bring him down and determine his fate through the Orisha.”
“I hope it’s as easy as you see it.” Kadin shook his head. “Why the protective
circle?”
“Well, once I see him, I’ll have a trick up my sleeve.” Emmanuel smiled. “A
trick that I hope will hold him long enough to pull Armon out of him. If I can
hold him long enough, then we can destroy that Palo Muerto.”
“What if this power of his, remains?” Kadin asked.
“Then we’ll attack with full force.” Emmanuel explained. “We’ll come at him
with every weapon we have, from every angle. He can’t allow that power to exist
in this world.”
“So tell me,” Kadin’s warm smile spread across his face. “What really hap-
pened during your crowning? It’s said that you levitated in air, and a light shined
down on you from the clear night sky.”
“Is that what everyone is saying now?” Emmanuel laughed. “I will honestly tell
you that I don’t remember. I was in the middle of the ceremony, and then I woke
up when it was all over.”
“Come now, Emmanuel.” Kadin patted his back. “Don’t be humble. I really
want to know.”
“And I would really love to satisfy your curiosity.” Emmanuel laughed. “But I
can’t, Sorry.”
Luis and June came out the Kadin’s house, stretching and walking toward
them, having slept most of the morning. Kadin admired their ability to forget the
situation at hand, and enjoy a good night’s rest.
“Damn. Everyone’s up at the crack of dawn out here.” Luis said, rubbing his
eye. “Where can I take a bath at?”
“Forget the bath for now. Get your Palo Muerto, and come back to me.”
Emmanuel said, then looked to June. “You too, go!”
The two ran back to the house, their luggage placed at the steps of Kadin’s
house. Opening the long cardboard box, they pulled out their Palos, walking
back over to Emmanuel.
“Now our defenses are great.” Emmanuel explained. “But you two will be
with Kadin the entire time. As we practiced at home, when he comes and I
immobilize him, it’s up to you three to elevate Armon.”
 Daniel Vega 151

“I don’t see how you can have us do that.” June protested. “You’re the stron-
gest of us all, why can’t we hold Joseph, and you elevate Armon?”
“I won’t be holding Joseph physically.” Emmanuel explained. “If it was in my
power, to teach you what I will be doing in a few hours, then I would, but I don’t
think we have that time.”
“Do you have any idea what he’s doing?” Luis asked. “How far is he? What’s
he been doing?”
“I have no idea.” Emmanuel admitted. “I can feel him though. I know he’s
preparing for something, and he is eager to get that book. We just need to worry
about what we need to do.”
The guide drove his jeep back into the village, four men getting out with him
and approaching Kadin.
“The others agreed to send assistance.” He said as he approached. “No guns
though, but they are brave warriors ready to fight.”
“I don’t think guns will help much anyway.” Emmanuel admitted. “I don’t
know what weapons we can use that would truly stop him, but we’ll use every-
thing that we can get our hands on.”

Joseph looked over the stones which marked the graves of the dead, from three
different villages. He walked through it, seeing the spirits observing him. Armon
walked alone his side, until they reached the center of the burial site.
“Are you ready?” Armon asked Joseph.
“This is as good a place as any.” Joseph said, bending down and drawing a
symbol on the ground.
Joseph looked the symbol over, making sure that it was drawn correct before
placing both hands out at his side, digging his fingers in the soil. He began chant-
ing to himself, slowly rising his voice. He pushed his thoughts out to the spirits
that roamed about, using his dark power to touch them all. The dirt at every
moment begun to shift, appearing like a drop of water appears when exposed to
hot oil.
The sound of people screaming began to echo, despite the fact that there was
no surrounding wall to vibrate from. Shadows began to emerge from the graves
clear across the burial site. Angry spirits could be heard crying out, drawing the
light into their vast darkness. Joseph rose to his feet, his eyes closed, his hands out
stretched, calling to these spirits, feeding them power.
Armon projected his words into Joseph’s mind.
“It’s working. Keep doing what you’re doing.”
152 The Palo Muerto

Joseph turned his hands, palms up, his voice reaching out to the dead, pulling
them closer, the numbers of dark shadows increasing. He pulled until there was
nothing left to pull, opening his eyes, he could see what he brought into the
world.
Hundreds of dark spirits, appearing like skeletons in black cloaks, floated
around him. Their hatred of the living, inspired ten times folds in them, their
hunger for life magnified. He looked at his new dark army, smiling, knowing that
his power had granted them the strength they would need to manipulate the
physical.
He held out his Palo Muerto, tossing it into the air, watching as all the spirits
rushed to it. He suspended it in the air, the spirits becoming one with it as they
came against it. He held it there, waiting until there wasn’t a single one left. He
brought it down, taking hold of his Palo Muerto, cold against his palm, amazed
that he literally held an army in his hand.
“Now the odds are even.” Joseph said, looking to Armon. “Now we go get
what’s rightfully ours.”

Emmanuel watched with respect as a small group of men scaled the mountain
side, with Remy. Once atop they waited long enough to help each other get to
the top, then ran off following the direction of the mountain pass. They were
high walls, roughly 75 feet, with a trail atop, just for the sole purpose of defend-
ing this village.
With men in place, guarding the pass, and everyone in position within the vil-
lage, it was only a matter of time before this small war would break out. To think
that a battle of this caliber, was directed at one man, was enough to make every-
one respect the power of the Orisha, weather it is good or bad.
“So now what?” June asked, sitting on the step to Kadin’s flat.
“Now we wait.” Said Emmanuel, he sat next to June. “The only thing we need
now is for Joseph to attack.”
“That’s a lot of people yo.” June laughed. “All this for one man.”
“A man who has a powerful Santero as a Muerto.” Emmanuel added. “A man
that sold his soul for power. Frankly, I don’t think we have enough men. What I
believe though, is that what we lack in manpower; we make up in faith of the
Orisha. If we are to win, we have to have unquestionable faith that they will fight
with us.”
“Padrino, I have all the respect in the world for them, and you know this.”
Stated June. “They have done the unthinkable for me, but the way you say it, you
 Daniel Vega 153

act as though they’ll be down here with his knife in hands, fighting against this
guy.”
“Let me tell you something you probably never heard about.” Emmanuel
smiled. “During the time of Slavery, the island of Haiti was occupied by Napo-
leon’s army, a small band of rebel slaves gathered. One of these slaves, was a Priest
within our faith, and gathering together they made a vow to Oggun, the spirit of
war, who also has power over metal.
“Their vow was simple, if Oggun would grant them victory, and drive off their
oppressors, they would dedicate their lives to him. Soon after, these simple slaves,
began their attack on slave owners, and the army itself, using only Machetes,
racks, whatever tools they could find to use as weapons. What will shock you is
that, that was the only successful slave rebel in history.
“So as you sit there, asking what the Orisha could do at a time like this, you
need to remember the power that Oggun gave those men in their darkest hour.
As we sit here, waiting for a man that has knowledge in the darkest arts known to
man, with power we never saw until now, we place our lives in the hands of the
Orisha, knowing that they can easily give us the power to overcome this adver-
sary.”
“That’s some deep shit right there.” June said, smiling at Emmanuel. “I ain’t
ever know that shit.”
“That’s one of the biggest issues,” Emmanuel explained. “People don’t know.
It seems that no matter how much is put in front of them, they don’t accept the
reality of what we do.”
“Well, give it time, Padrino.” Said June. “How long can people ignore us?”
“That’s the one question I never wanted to answer.” Emmanuel said, shaking
his head. “So far, people have been ignoring, or believe the worst of us, for thou-
sands of years. The one thing you can be sure of is that, we’re here, and ain’t
going anywhere.”
“That’s for damn sure!” June said. “I figured out what I want to do, yo. I want
to bring people to the faith. I want to find people, and teach them the truth
about the Orisha. If I can reach thirty people in my life time, I will be happy.”
“Thirty?” Emmanuel asked. “Sounds like you don’t believe in yourself.”
“I do.” June said. “It’s just that I wanna be real with myself, and I know that
I’m not a good teacher. It’s not easy for me to start at the beginning and walk
people through any lesson with patience. So 30 sounds like a reasonable number
to me.”
“Well that might be true, June.” Said Emmanuel. “But you forget that when
they work through you, anything is possible. You can touch the hearts of thou-
154 The Palo Muerto

sands of people, just by the way you carry yourself, the way you feel about life.
You are the biggest testimony to everyone. If people see you are successful in
everything that you do, they’re gonna wanna know how you did it, what was
your inspiration. When they find out, it was because of the Orisha, that will have
the biggest impact.
“From there it’s a chain reaction. You help one person, and they talk about it
to other people. They come to you to see if everything is true, and you touch
them. The truth is the most infectious thing in this world, but not everyone will
handle it the same way. They will always remember it, that’s how I hoped to help
out so many and I have.”
“That’s, wussup!” June said, pulling his shirt from sticking to his body. “I seri-
ously need a shower though. Where can I take a bath at?”
“There’s a water pump behind the house.” Emmanuel pointed over his shoul-
der. “Get a bucket, or basin, and draw some water. Just try and wash yourself as
best as possible.”
“Bet!” June stood up and ran into the house.
“June!” Emmanuel called out. “If you see smoke, that’s a sign that Joseph’s
reached the mountain pass. You need to make your way to the entrance of the vil-
lage and find Kadin right then.”
“I gotcha yo.” June said, turning and running out the back door.
“This is what I look forward to!” Luis said, sitting down where Luis had been.
“The battles, overcoming evil, that sorta thing.”
“This isn’t a game, Luis.” Emmanuel shook his head at him. “Just look at this
village, and the people here. They were placed here by design to protect a great
evil. If Joseph has half the power I think he does, then many of these guys will die
before night fall.”
“Yeah, I know that.” Said Luis. “But you can’t deny that this gives them all a
sense of purpose. This is what they have been preparing for, and now it’s coming
to pass. So sometimes you have to ask yourself, what good will we be, if we didn’t
have evil to fight against. Like it’s necessary in order for us to have our purpose.”
“Necessary evil.” Emmanuel laughed. “I’ve heard that so many times through
my life, and yeah, you have a point. I guess in the end it all comes down to our
fate.”
“This is mine.” Luis said, looking toward the mountain pass, and biting his
lip. “Before that day that I was taken to you, shit in my life was crazy, I felt noth-
ing. Each day was just another and if I died, it wouldn’t have mattered to me.
When you opened my eyes, and showed me this new world, which was always
there, for the first time in my life I felt right.
 Daniel Vega 155

“You always say that what you have is a curse. I can understand, since I see
things now, not like you do but close enough to understand why you would
think that way. But, Padrino, if you really believe it to be a curse, what do you
think of me? That curse, saved my life. If you hate it, or see it as a burden, then
you hated the fact that you saved my life.”
“That is the farthest thing from the truth, Luis.” Emmanuel interrupted. “If
there is something I love about this, it’s the Orisha, and my god children. I’ve
never been more proud in anyone, then I have always been of you. I’m hard on
you, and act the way I do, because I need for you to be better then me, grow
smarter, become stronger. You will carry on what I started when my fate has been
fulfilled.
“What I see as a curse, is nothing more then me having no choice with whom
I am. You walked into this with your eyes opened, and grow with it. You choose
it, and it chooses you. With me, I had no say in what I would become, I was born
and this is what I am. That’s the curse I talk about, not having a say in the mat-
ter.”
“I’m glad you had no choice.” Luis said, looking straight into Emmanuel’s
eyes. “I might have been dead if you had chosen otherwise.”
 13

A small band of hunters gathered at the mouth of the mountain pass. Wooden
spears with metal tips, this instrument used with skill could be used to bring
down lions, elephants, any of the jungles fierce predators. They kept their bodies
low in the bush, awaiting their newest prey. A man, one that proved to be the
greatest predator this world would ever see.
They come out of the pass, fanning out into the bush, hoping that they would
be able to stop this foe before he could reach the army that had been awaiting
him. Glory could be theirs if they were swift and cunning. This man was great so
he would have the death of any of their trophies. How they smiled at the idea of
bringing his head back, severed from his body, with the tale of how he fell under
their great hunting skills.
They covered some distance from the mountain, stopping and pushing their
bodies’ low to the ground. One of the hunters lifted a hand, signally the others
that something had been approaching. Joseph had appeared a distance from
them, walking without showing any sign of his awareness to them.
“This is it.” One hunter whispered. “This is the one that they all fear.”
“Glory will be ours.” The other hunter said, signally across the bush to the
others as they concealed themselves, though they were ready with their attack.
Joseph stopped, sitting on a large stone that had been on the side of the road.
He looked straight ahead of him, putting his head down as if he were praying. He
was still and vulnerable.
“What is he doing?” the hunter asked, anxiety gripping him. “Why is he wait-
ing?”

- 156 -
 Daniel Vega 157

“What was that?” one of the hunter’s voice rose just above a whisper as some-
thing passed by him with great speed.
“Be quiet!” the head hunter snapped. “He’ll hear us.”
Turning away from his noisy friend, the head hunters jaw relaxed, his mouth
opened in fear. A dark shadow hoovered before him, a transparent skeleton
seemed to be wrapped in shadow stared down at him, quickly turning the hunter
into the prey.
“What is this?” It was too late for him to receive an answer. The creature
reached down, it’s icy hand grabbing his neck, it flew into the night sky. The oth-
ers stood there in fear, as it took a nose dive straight to the ground, passing
through it as though the earth hadn’t been real, the head hunter’s body breaking
with the impact.
The others turned to run but the shadows around them seemed to take form.
More of these hellish creatures appeared, reaching out and grabbing the hunters.
Screams disturbed the wildlife throughout the jungle. Joseph rose to his feet and
continued his journey, knowing that in their last moments, they knew he was
greater then them.
Joseph came to the mountain pass. This long winding stretches of land, the
only way in or out of the village where his prize was hidden. He walked forward,
the moon providing light from the clear night sky. His Palo Muerto tapping
against the ground, with every step he took, his sinister smile still spread out on
his face.
“They’re watching us.” Joseph whispered to Armon. “I can feel their eyes
looking down from the mountain top.”
“They’re waiting until you let your guard down.” Armon’s words forming in
his mind. “Fools! They think to stop you as they stopped me, with poisoned darts
and arrows.”
They pushed forward still, coming to a place where the mountains tightened
on the pass, Joseph knowing that this is where they seek to strike. He stopped and
lifted his head, looking across the range of the mountain tops.
“If you wish to stop me, now is your chance.” Joseph shouted out, his voice
echoing through the pass. “I will give you this chance to strike before I rip you in
pieces.”
There was silence, Joseph knowing they were attempting to remain concealed.
“They’re hoping to not be discovered.” Armon said.
An arrow came flying through the air, but Joseph needed only a thought to
stop it only inches from his neck. Suspended in mid air, he looked at the arrow,
then at the top of the valley.
158 The Palo Muerto

“Only one arrow?” Joseph laughed. “Do you honestly think you have the
resources with you to stop me?”
The sound of bow cords began to fill the mountain pass, Joseph finding him-
self stopping arrow after arrow only a few feet away from him. All where aimed to
kill, all were dipped in poisons that would have paralyzed him. He knew they had
run short of arrows, as they nearly completely blanketed him, countless arrows
suspended before him with thought.
He changed his focus, and all the arrows fell to the ground. Lifting his Palo
Muerto, he plunged in into the ground, stepping back as it began to vibrate.
“Come forth and destroy my hidden enemies!” Joseph voice boomed through
the pass.
The Palo Muerto struck out from the dirt, the ground in which it had pro-
truded from seemed to emit a dark mist. Appearing as though the earth itself had
been bleeding this evil darkness, when it began shifting and taken shape. Sud-
denly, the mist separated and ghost-like figures begun to fly through the pass.
Skeleton figures, clad in black cloaks, moving at unhuman speeds shifted through
the night air.
They charged at the mountain, disappearing into the rock, voices coming
from atop as they carried men through the air, and plunging them down to the
ground.

“What manner of voodoo is this?” the man on the mountain top asked,
watching as these deadly spirits ripped men from the mountain and dropped
them to their death.
He turned to run, when the man standing next to him was grabbed by skele-
tons hand, emerging from the ground beneath him. He froze in horror, as the
head of this spirit rose up, pulling the man into the air as it shot off the ground,
shrill cries striking greater fear into his heart.
Watching, the spirit rose into the air, carrying the man by the legs, then dove
down, it’s ghostly body disappearing into the mountain, the man collied against
the ground, his bones snapping on impact.
“Leave here, and signal the others.” The man turned to see Remy, his staff in
hand.
“Remy!” the man felt his body relaxing, feeling safe in the presence of this
man.
“Run!” Remy ordered him again. “Set the fire and get back to the village.”
A spirit slowly decent from the night sky, looking down on the two, its evil
energy could be felt from it. Remy grabbed his staff with both hands, and spread
 Daniel Vega 159

his legs apart as though he was preparing to fight a man. The spirit charged at
him, bringing his staff up he struck it, manipulating its spirit form on impact.
Remy reached to his waist line, pulling powder from a small leather pouch
which had been tied to his garments, and scattered it in the wind. The spirit
howled in pain as the wind blew it against it. Looking over his shoulder, Remy
could see the blazing fire that the man had started, the smoke alerting those at the
village that Joseph was approaching.
Leaping back, a spirit passed through the mountain, intending on using it’s
force to crush Remy, though his alertness and training saved him from the attack-
ing spirit. It stopped in the air, short of a few feet away, then turned. The two
stared at each other for a moment before Remy stomped his foot on the ground,
then drew a symbol on the ground with his foot, the spirit then charged.
Lowering his staff, Remy waited at the approaching spirit crashed into an
unseen force, the symbol on the ground he had drawn had been one to ward
away Evil. Reaching out him hand, he passed through its spiritual body, chanted
a few words. He pulled his hand out the spirit, made a fist, and struck the spirit
clean in the chest.
Watching the spirit flying backwards to the center of the mountain pass, it
stopped and attempted to advance again on Remy, but was unable to move.
Chanting, Remy looked at the spirit, aware that all the others had turned their
evil on him. Waiting patiently, he pulled the spirit back to him, as the others
began to advance on him.
Joseph watched as the man fought successfully against his forces, though sure
that they would now rip him in pieces. He observed as the spirit he had been
fighting with struck him, knocking him to the ground as the others advanced on
him. He fought against them on the ground, the spirit that had been fighting
with him had slowly flown down, stopping in front of Joseph.
“What is this?” he asked the spirit, then recoiled as it faded away, Remy stand-
ing in front of him.
“I’m allowing your evil to destroy itself.” Remy said, knowing that the man
that had fallen, was the spirit he had first been fighting. Transforming its appear-
ance into the likeness of his own body, they all fought against it, as though it was
him. “Now you and I have time to end this battle.”
“You’re not the one that I imaged would come to stop me.” Joseph laughed.
“You have talent, but you’re not Emmanuel.”
“He awaits you at the village.” Remy smiled. “But I’m hoping you won’t have
the honor to die at his hands.”
160 The Palo Muerto

Without notice, Remy leaped forward, bringing the bottom of his staff flush
against Joseph’s chest knocking him back. Amazed at his speed, Joseph rose to his
feet surprised that Remy was able to move without him being able to foresee it.
Raising to his feet, Remy sprang into action again. Joseph quickly side stepped
and pushed his thoughts to the arrows on the ground. Rising into the air, they all
turned, arrowheads aiming at Remy, then pushed through the air.
Engaged in a series of flips, and dive-rolls, Remy managed to dodge the arrows
which were propelled by Joseph’s dark power, inch by inch, he found himself
closer to Joseph, then brought his elbow against his chest, watching as the arrows
fell to the ground with Joseph’s concentration broken.
Joseph brought his hand to his chest, now upset that this man was able to
strike the same spot twice. Enraged, he pushed his thoughts onto Remy. A satis-
fying look now on his face as he lifted the man off his feet, his power gaining con-
trol of the situation yet again.
“You idiot!” Joseph snapped, picking an arrow off the ground and slowly
approaching Remy who was helpless in his unseen grip. “I will rip you into
pieces!”
Joseph stopped in front of Remy, lifting the arrow he brought it down toward
his heart. His eyes widen as Remy caught his hand, then brought his knee up to
Joseph’s chin, extending his leg, brought his heel once again to his chest.
Joseph fell backwards, looking up as the man fell from his grip.
“How is he breaking free from my power?” Joseph pushed his thoughts to his
father.
“His staff is a ward against this kind of power.” Armon responded. “It is older
then you and I, a tool which was created by the first civilization to fight those that
gained this power. As long as it’s in his hand, he is safe against our power.”
Rising to his feet, Joseph brought his Palo Muerto to the ground, all the spirits
still engaged against themselves on the mountain top stopped, and looked down
to see Remy. They turned their attention back to the man, and charged down.
Swinging his staff in a series of disciplined strikes, Remy found himself being
drawn away from Joseph by these evil spirits. His staff striking and pushing each
spirit away, as they slowly drove him back into the mountain pass. Now he was
the only thing between the book and Joseph.
Dropping down to one knee, Remy plunged his staff into the ground, chant-
ing and slowly vibrating his staff. All the spirits seemed to strike against an unseen
barrier around Remy, Joseph’s anger now welling up as he noticed this man’s
strength and skill.
 Daniel Vega 161

Remy pulled out a small grey stone from his pouch, a thunder stone, sacred to
Chango. Tossing it in the air, he threw a handful of powder into the air, turning
and running as the spirits recoiled from it.
Looking down, Joseph pushed his thoughts to the arrows, lifting one with his
mind, and sending it ripping through the air. He felt his heart leap as it sank into
the shoulder of Remy, knowing that he had proved to be the stronger of the two.
Remy looked over his shoulder as he ran through the pass, feeling the pain of
the arrow which was buried in his shoulder. He stopped for a moment, knowing
he had gained enough distance from Joseph and his evil army, and pulled out two
large leafs covered in oil from his pouch. He rolled them up, then put them in his
mouth, sucking the oil and juices from them.
Knowing that he successfully neutralized the poison from the arrows, he
turned and pushed forward, ready to plan another attack from the village.

Emmanuel jumped to his feet, seeing the smoke rising over the mountain
pass.
“Kadin!” Emmanuel snapped, pointing to the smoke. “Get everyone in posi-
tion.”
Emmanuel ran across the village, standing in the circles of protection, looking
to the mountain pass.
“Padrino!” June approached, looking from the smoke to Emmanuel. “This is
it!”
“Find Kadin!” Emmanuel barked at him, looking as men ran into hiding with
blades of all kinds. Women ran into their huts and houses with children in arms.
“I know you’re scared. It’s normal. Just follow the plan and everything will be
fine. Don’t drop the ball here, I will fight for you as long as I have life in my
body.”
“Remember what we talked about.” Eleggua appeared in front of Emmanuel,
June ran toward the mountain pass, finding Kadin, and taking position. “This
battle is a great one for mankind. This poison cannot infect anyone else. Joseph
must be stopped here, but should your faith in us fail, then all will be over. We’re
here with you all, and we will help you.”
Eleggua faded away as quickly as he appeared, Emmanuel took hold of his
Palo Muerto tighter in his hand, dropping to one knee.
“Orisha, hear me in my darkest hour.” Emmanuel began to pray. “The most
powerful of evils, brought into this world by man’s desire for power, is advancing
on us. In your name we stand here, ready to engage it, not knowing the outcome,
but with the faith that this battle will be one that you will partake of.
162 The Palo Muerto

“Though I will not question my faith, give hope and encouragement to those
that are here today with me. Give them the strength to overcome their own fears,
and show them the way through this. All things are possible with you, and I
know that our enemy will fall.”
Emmanuel rose to his feet, tapping his Palo Muerto against the floor, a man
appeared next to him. He had long blonde hair, blue eyes, and a light complex-
ion.
“Been a long time my old friend.” Emmanuel said, smiling at his own Muerto.
“Tonight we go to battle. Are you ready?”
“As I am always!” the Muerto said, fading away, though his words still formed
in Emmanuel’s mind. “We will always fight our greatest enemies together, with
everything that we have.”
Everyone paused as they saw movement in the pass, though Kadin quickly rec-
ognized Remy as he came into view. He ran out, helping his friend back into the
village.
“What happened?” Kadin asked, seeing the arrow in Remy’s shoulder.
“Joseph has great power.” Remy said, grunting as Kadin pulled the arrow out
his shoulder. “He has an army of spirits, never have I seen any with such power. I
have wounded him slightly, though he wasn’t too far behind me. Where is
Emmanuel?”
Kadin pointed to Emmanuel in his circles of protection, and without another
word, he proceeded straight over to him.
“Forgive me.” Remy said, dropping down to one knee, and taking hold of
Emmanuel’s arm. “I was proud. I was offended that an outsider would come to
save us, when it was I that trained for such an enemy. Though I am strong, I now
understand that you are the one chosen to stop this adversary.”
“I find no honor in fighting him.” Emmanuel said, pulling Remy to his feet.
“He is an enemy that I wish had been my brother. A Santero turned evil is always
a sad thing to think of.”
“He is powerful.” Remy added. “Had it not been for the staff of my ancestor,
he would have destroyed me with ease. I’m still strong enough to fight, though I
will leave him in your hands. I will handle his dark forces. You do what the
Orisha brought you here to do in the first place. Rest assure that I will do every-
thing in my power to keep the enemy spirits off your back.”
“With that out of my mind, Remy, I will be able to focus on the true enemy.”
Emmanuel said. “Thank you, brother.”
Remy turned and ran over to Kadin, driving June and Luis against the wall,
awaiting Joseph to advance.
 Daniel Vega 163

Emmanuel turned around, beckoning for a man with a torch to light a bonfire
in the center of the village, just behind Emmanuel. He ran forward and tossed the
torch in the circle of stone, the kindle taking the flame and igniting.
Joseph emerged from the pass, his Palo Muerto in his hand. Emmanuel could
feel the power surrounding him, knowing that this man had tapped into a power
so dark, it had already replaced his soul. He walked through the pass, and into
the village, stopped with his eyes locked on Emmanuel.
“Come now!” Joseph shouted out. “An ambush? Have you all really grown
that afraid that you need to ambush one man?”
“No!” Emmanuel called back to him. “Just that they know this battle should
end with me and you.”
“I’ve grown beyond you, Emmanuel.” Joseph said, walking forward without
fear. “You could have shared this power with me, but you couldn’t see past your
Orisha. Now you will die by that power.”
Joseph held out his hand, and brought his Palo Muerto down, those dark spir-
its flowing from it, and spreading out throughout the village. Emmanuel could
hear the screaming of men, as these dark spirits begun ripping them out of hid-
ing, and bash them into walls, as their own spiritual form passed through them.
He turned, feeling fear as a skeleton like hand, wrapped around the arm of a
man, and fly into the air, taking the man with him. It stopped a few hundred feet
in the air, then dove down, breaking the man’s body with the collision against the
ground.
“He will kill them all if he’s not stopped!” Emmanuel thought to himself.
Emmanuel looked at Joseph, a smile spreading across his face. He closed his
eyes, knowing that what he planned would not be anything Joseph would have
been expecting. Concentrating, Emmanuel pulled his spirit from his own body,
and rushed forward, stopping in front of Joseph.
Joseph gasped, frozen in horror at the sight of the spirit before him. He tried
to call to his father, but the thought of this spirit before him was too confusing.
“Now!” Kadin called out, emerging from hiding with Luis and June, as they
surrounded Joseph, and begun chanting in another language. They pound their
Palo Muertos against the earth, extending their hands out to Joseph.
“They are attempting to elevate me!” Armon’s words came into Joseph’s
mind. “You must stop them!”
“This spirit has me!” Joseph fears reflect with his panic. “I cannot move.”
Joseph felt his knees buckle, a ringing sound came to his ears which begun to
block Armon’s words from him.
164 The Palo Muerto

Emmanuel stepped closer, feeling the power of Armon fading away with the
Elevation. He could also feel the fear in Joseph’s heart, if he only knew what truly
stood before him.
Armon’s spirit rose above Joseph’s body, light seeming to appear above him.
“You cannot do this!” Armon called out, looking at them all with hatred. “I
have not yet completed my journey!”
Armon’s spirit passed into the light and vanished.
Joseph felt a spirit drawing near, with all his strength, he called to it. Emman-
uel felt his spirit pull back into his body, as a spirit stopped between him and
Joseph. Its skeleton hands attempting to reach out and grab him.
Joseph looked at Karin, Luis, and June. His hatred welling as he felt his fathers
absences. Pushing his thoughts out to them, they lifted from the ground.
“I will rip you to pieces!” he told them, spit flying from his mouth, his rage
now too great to control.
Joseph felt his power as he gathered his thoughts, feeling their bodies pulling
to the point of being ripped into pieces when a sharp pain came to his chest.
Remy, standing next to him had brought his staff into his chest, and before
Joseph could prepare himself, was kicked in the face. He fell back, looking up at
the man.
Gathering himself, he focused on Remy’s staff, and with a thought, he ripped
it from his grip, and sent it flying to the other side of the village. Without his pro-
tection, Joseph called out to his dark army, sending them flying toward him. One
flew around him, grabbing him by one leg, reaching for his pouch, another
appeared, taking hold of his arm.
Emmanuel watched in horror as these spirits lifted Remy off his feet, pulling
him in different directions, with every intention of destroying him in the most
painful way possible. Stepping out of his circles of protection, he tapped his Palo
against the ground, directing his thoughts to the helpless man.
Emmanuel’s Muerto appeared, leaping into the air, its spiritual body manipu-
lating the laws of reality, as it ripped one of the spirits off of Remy. Emmanuel
turned his attention to his Godsons, seeing that they too were overrun by these
dark spirits, though Luis had already drawn a circle of protection around the two
of them.
Joseph was approaching the two. His thoughts bent on watching them die
horrible deaths.
“Father. I need you more then ever.” Emmanuel fell to his knees. “I cannot
save everyone, but I know that it is within your power. Come to us, and bring an
end to this madness.”
 Daniel Vega 165

“As always, Emmanuel, you never cease to amaze us.” Eleggua’s words came
into Emmanuel’s mind.
Everyone could feel their hands stand on end, and their blood run cold as a
child appeared in the center of the village. He brought a finger to his lips, it
almost appeared as though he was smiling.
“Shh.” The gesture escaped from Eleggua, and every spirit spotted in the vil-
lage. Joseph turned feeling his legs shaking in Eleggua’s presence.
“Brother and sister!” Eleggua’s words came to the ears of everyone in the vil-
lage, though only the voice of a child, carried great power. “Come forth!”
The bonfire erupted, and what appeared to be a giant fireball shot into the sky.
It stopped over the village, then came charging down, striking the ground with
tremendous force. Watching with amazement, the fireball formed into a man,
then blew out, leaving a tall powerful figure in its place.
“Chango!” Kadin gasped, feeling the power of Chango running through his
body.
Chango stood in his place, a double edge axe in his hand his golden crown on
his head. He looked into the fire, when it erupted again, this time a fire ball shot
forth and exploded a few feet from the ground, a woman came forth. Clad in a
robe of seven different colors, with striking beauty, all the spirits became enraged
at the sight of Oya.
“Do not fear them!” Joseph shouted out to the shifting spirits, appearing to be
frightened at the sight of the Orisha. “My power has freed you from their grip!
Destroy them all!”
The spirits gathered like a dark cloud in the center of the village, directing
their attention to the Orisha. Within a second, they began throwing themselves
at them. Chango with great speed came against the cloud of spirits, his axe cut-
ting through their spiritual form, as they fell before him, vanished into the after
life.
Oya followed Chango, opening her mouth and shooting a blue flame which
engulfed large quantities of spirits at a time. Everyone stood in amazement, as the
power of the Orisha knocked the number of the evil spirits in half in seconds.
Eleggua, with his arms behind his back, walked across the village, straight
toward Emmanuel. A spirit saw the child and charged him, Emmanuel watched
as the child held out a hand in a manner as though to say stop, and the spirit
came to a halt. He extended a finger and touched the ghost, it spun in horror, as
its essences begun to fade from this existence.
166 The Palo Muerto

“We have done what we said we would do.” Eleggua spoke to Emmanuel, the
warrior raging behind the child. “Now it is time that you finish what you have
come so far to accomplish.”
Emmanuel turned, sweeping the village with his eyes, until he saw Joseph who
had been watching in horror as his Army was being destroyed before him. Walk-
ing straight forward, with his Palo Muerto in hand, Emmanuel stopped a few feet
short of the man
“This doesn’t have to end with more death.” Emmanuel said, watching as
Joseph’s attention shifting back on him. “You should be a brother to us all, not
an enemy. Give me the Palo so it can be destroyed and set aside your lust for this
power. It will never be yours.”
“You’ve taken everything else away from me.” Joseph said, sounding as
though he had been speaking to himself rather then to Emmanuel. “My father.
My army. My dreams. Everything. Now you want to take the only thing I have
left? Are you insane?”
Joseph pushed his thoughts to Emmanuel and lift him from the ground.
Walking forward, he stopped in front of Emmanuel, watching as his power had
completely dominated him.
“You can get no where with this approach.” Emmanuel said, feeling a pressure
holding him in his place. “Not everything is as it appears, and your power is no
different.”
“Shut up!” Joseph yelled, Emmanuel could see Luis and June approaching
Joseph from behind, but one look from Emmanuel stopped the two. “Everything
is exactly as it seems, everything! No one will deny me of one last accomplish-
ment. I’m going to kill you!”
Emmanuel focused his thoughts on his Orisha, feeling them there, and watch-
ing as they had destroyed one of the most evil forces that had manifested in the
eyes of man. He could feel the fear in his godsons, Kadin’s faith in his abilities,
even Remy’s respect. Suddenly, he felt something inside of himself welling up
against the pressure.
Emmanuel couldn’t explain it but he felt it before, the day of his crowning.
Searching within himself, Emmanuel could feel power he feared using in his life-
time. He could feel his body relax, his heart leapt, closing his eyes, he called to
that power.
“What are you doing?” Joseph begun backing away as he felt his thoughts
break off of Emmanuel. Horrified even farther to see that Emmanuel remained
suspended in the air as his power was forced off of him. “You can’t possibly do
that! No where in the teachings does it teach that to Santeros!”
 Daniel Vega 167

Emmanuel’s body lowered to the ground, as he felt his feet touch down, he
opened his eyes. Joseph froze, looking into all white eyes, and an unusual white
light enveloping Emmanuel.
“What the hell is this?” Luis asked, looking to Kadin. “Are the Orisha mount-
ing him?”
“I don’t think so.” Kadin said, sounding just as fascinated as Luis.
“Give up this power, Joseph.” Emmanuel’s voice came to everyone’s ears
softer, yet with great authority. “Evil will only destroy you, set it aside or die by
what you covet so dearly.”
Emmanuel felt his body tingling with power, though he knew he was only at
the surface of what was waking up in him. His mind continued to search within
himself for a means to stop this crazed Santero, when he felt the power explode in
him.
Outstretching his hand toward Joseph, he noticed the light surrounding his
body for the first time, though it didn’t surprise him. Concentrating, Emmanuel
smiled at Joseph, knowing he was preparing to attack.
Joseph focused on Emmanuel and attempted to crush him with his thoughts,
when he felt the pressure closing in on himself. He relaxed, then gathered his
thoughts on slamming Emmanuel against the wall, when it turned on him, and
shot him backwards until he came crashing into the mountain side with a bone
crushing force.
Emmanuel began walking, passing the Orisha, who had finished destroying
the last of Joseph’s evil army. Stopping in front of him, he held his hand out,
when the Palo Muerto of Armon rose from beside Joseph, and came against
Emmanuel’s hand.
“This power is not for you.” Emmanuel said, looking at the Palo and watching
as blue flames engulfed it. He knelt down and touched Joseph, the pain pushing
out of his body, and all his wounds instantly mending. “Forget the book, and this
power. Seek the forgiveness of the Orisha and find your place again.”
“No!” Joseph screamed, attempting to use his power to attack Emmanuel
again, he found that it was no longer there. “What did you do to me?”
“I removed that dark taint from you.” Emmanuel said, looking down to
Joseph. “A gift to help you on your way.”
Looking around, Joseph picked up a machete from next to a man that had
been killed by a spirit in the battle, and charged at Emmanuel. He watched
Joseph as he plunged the blade at his stomach, only to shatter in pieces as though
it had been made of glass. Emmanuel held his hand out, and Joseph was lifted
from the ground.
168 The Palo Muerto

“Since you refuse to give up your way,” Emmanuel begun. “I will push all
knowledge from your mind. I will make you as right as an infant.”
Emmanuel pushed his senses into the mind of Joseph, preparing to remove all
his memories, when a blinding light broke his concentration. Focusing on
Joseph’s left, he could see David’s spirit appearing from the light.
“He has another fate.” David said, looking at Emmanuel who had been tear-
ing. “Fear not my brother. This is where his path comes to an end.”
Reaching his hand into Joseph’s chest, David pulled out his soul. Kadin and
all everyone around had watched as Joseph’s soul stared back at his own body,
before fading away with David, his body falling lifeless to the ground.
Emmanuel let go of the feeling he had welled up inside himself, his eyes now
returning to normal, and his voice returning to normal. Kadin and his godsons
ran over to his side, looking at him with pure amazement.
“What was that?” Luis asked, grabbing Emmanuel’s hand, and examining it.
He looked at everyone who had been watching him, awaiting another miracle
to be witnessed, when it came to them all. Emmanuel fell to his knees and begun
weeping, his lips moving, and understanding came to everyone. He had been
praying for everyone who had just died, even Joseph who had fallen so far from
the grace of God.
 14

“All packed up?” Emmanuel asked his god sons, happy now that he would be
returning home after nearly three weeks. “I know I can’t wait until I’m watching
TV on my recliner again.”
“I just want a cheese steak.” Luis said, putting his luggage down on the ground
by the jeep that was preparing to take them to the airport. “I want concrete
streets, sidewalks, and liquor.”
“I wanna stay here.” June said, looking down to the ground. “Well, I’m going
to stay here.”
“You what?” Emmanuel asked, Luis staring in shock.
“Not forever.” June said, licking his lips, searching for the right words to say.
“I wanna finish my Yawo here. I was talking with Kadin and Remy, and they
agreed to teach me here. Being home has too many distractions to me, but being
here, I’m so focused. Remy even agreed to teach me all the secrets to his train-
ing.”
“If this is what you think will make you better, then I’m all for it.” Emmanuel
said, pulling June closer and embracing him. “It’ll be good for you.”
“You can’t just leave without telling me how you did all that with Joseph
thoughts.” June said, knowing that Emmanuel had evaded the explanation for far
to long. “How did you do that?”
“Aiite.” Emmanuel said, smiling at Luis as he leaned in to listen. “What I did,
was something so simple, and what happened to me from it, is the result any one
of you can obtain. I tapped into the true power of the human spirit. By believing

- 169 -
170 The Palo Muerto

and understanding that we are all one with each other, and the creator himself, I
was able to tap into a limitless power.
“During that time, everything was known to me, time itself wasn’t a mystery.
When everyone truly seeks to become enlightened, and cast aside their difference
to truly love each other, that is how the world will become. Until that day, we
will all live a simple lie that we are individuals, when truly we are all one.”
“Fuck that riddle shit!” June snapped, his brows arched showing his complete
lack of understanding. “Just teach me how you did it!”
Emmanuel laughed, then closed his eyes. When he opened them, they had
become all white, with that strange light spreading over his body. Reaching and
placing his hand on June’s shoulder, he concentrated all his passions and love for
the religion into his heart and mind, so that for a second, June could feel how
Emmanuel felt for his Orisha.
“That is how I did it.” Emmanuel said, his eyes turning brown once again.
“What.” Luis asked, aware that he had missed something that was exchanged
between the two. “Show me too, shit!”
Emmanuel smiled at him, then turned and placed his bag inside of the jeep.
He turned, watching as Kadin approach, Remy aside of him, his shoulder ban-
daged up. They stopped, Remy bowed, and Kadin gave Emmanuel a salute.
“I guess there’s nothing I can do to convince you to stay with us.” Kadin
asked, the look on his face was almost pleading.
“I’m not needed here, Kadin.” Emmanuel answered, shaking his head. “Every-
one here is aware of the faith, and doesn’t need anything from me. I’m going
back where people know nothing, and try to spread the knowledge to those that
life in ignorance.”
“Honorable cause.” Kadin saluted Emmanuel as he sat in the jeep. Luis got in
the back. They both looked out the window, June standing next to Kadin.
“I’ll come back in a year.” Said Emmanuel. “On the year that marks your
birthday in Santeria, I’ll come back and get you myself.”
“I’d love that Padrino.” June smiled, his shoulders relaxing. “I promise that I
wouldn’t let you down. I’ma learn everything I can while I’m here and when I get
back home, I’ma be just like you.”
“Don’t be me, June.” Emmanuel shook his head. “Be exactly like you. See you
in a year.”
Emmanuel turned, the guide stepping on the gas peddles and the jeep took
off. Rolling his Palo Muerto in his hand, he felt completed. Finding his inner
strength, and over coming the most powerful of enemies, made him understand
why he was in this world.
 Daniel Vega 171

Jacob had been right all along. What he had always viewed to be a curse,
turned out to be the most wonderful gift God could have ever given him. Know-
ing that his god children were also on that path to becoming great, made every-
thing worth it in the end.
“I’m not coming back up here in a year, Padrino.” Luis said, looking out the
back window, the image of June had faded away in the distance. “This flight is
way to long, I’m just gonna wait for you home.”
“That’s fine.” Said Emmanuel, happy to finally be going home. “I’ll come by
myself.”
“Na.” Luis shook his head. “I can’t let you come by yourself. You always get
yourself into some shit. I’ll come, but you better conduct yourself like an adult.”
Emmanuel’s eyes opened wide and he spun in his seat to yell at Luis, when he
noticed that childish grin stretched out on his face. He smiled, and the two begun
to laugh.
“Breaking and entering, stealing a man’s Muerto, stalking people home!”
Emmanuel began from the list of Luis’s wrong doings the past few months. “And
that’s just what I’m aware of, don’t make me ask the Orisha what you did behind
my back!”
“Okay!” Luis sank in his seat. “I was only playing!”
Emmanuel turned around, relaxing in his seat, Luis stared, waiting for him to
close his eyes. Emmanuel did just that, when Luis snatched a pillow and smacked
Emmanuel over the head with it.
“You little shit!” Emmanuel jumped in the back seat, and the two of them
laughing as they fought for the pillow.

Emmanuel never knew that three weeks away from home could accumulate so
much dust. After cleaning off his Soperas, and lighting candles on his alter, he
closed the blinds to his bedroom window. His bed seemed like it’s own sanctu-
ary, one that he would enjoy sleeping in. He kicked his slippers off, and turned
the switch to the lap at his bed side. Waiting for blissful sleep to hit him, he felt
the familiar chills running up his legs.
Opening his eyes, he saw something before it took shape only a foot away
from him. He sat up, watching as Joseph’s spirit manifested itself in his room.
Emmanuel looked at his Soperas then back to Joseph, before waiting to figure out
what was happening.
“Forgive me, Brother.” Joseph’s words formed in Emmanuel’s mind. “Forgive
me for the wrong I’ve brought to you.”
Emmanuel stared back at Joseph, then licked his lips.
172 The Palo Muerto

“Joseph,” Emmanuel began. “I already have. Find peace, brother.”

Joseph lifted his head and nodded at Emmanuel. His spiritual arms crossed
and pounded against his chest as he faded away. Emmanuel watched until all evi-
dence of Joseph had vanished before laying back in bed.
“Everything always comes together in the end, Father.” He said aloud.
“You are right to believe that.” Eleggua’s words came to his mind. “And you
have always served us well.”